Honeywell Ms 9200Udls Users Manual Firms9200UDLScombenglA0

MS9200UDLS Installation Manual MS9200UDLS Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

MS-9200UDLSE to the manual 154cef1e-ba3b-4916-b6cc-4bcd91d3c987

2015-01-23

: Honeywell Honeywell-Ms-9200Udls-Users-Manual-261872 honeywell-ms-9200udls-users-manual-261872 honeywell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 188

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

PN: 52750:A

ECN 05-680

Fire Alarm Control Panel

MS-9200UDLS
MS-9200UDLSE
IMPORTANT! The SLC Manual Document #51309 must be referenced in addition to this
manual when installing or servicing the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

Document

#52750

11/04/05

Revision:

Fire Alarm System Limitations

While a fire alarm system may lower insurance
rates, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!

An automatic fire alarm system–typically made up of smoke
detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices, and a fire alarm control panel with remote notification capability–can provide early warning of a developing
fire. Such a system, however, does not assure protection
against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.

Heat detectors do not sense particles of combustion and
alarm only when heat on their sensors increases at a predetermined rate or reaches a predetermined level. Rate-of-rise
heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over
time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector
should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist. Heat detectors are designed to protect
property, not life.

The Manufacturer recommends that smoke and/or heat detectors be located throughout a protected premise following
the recommendations of the current edition of the National
Fire Protection Association Standard 72 (NFPA 72),
manufacturer's recommendations, State and local codes, and
the recommendations contained in the Guide for Proper Use
of System Smoke Detectors, which is made available at no
charge to all installing dealers. A study by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (an agency of the United States
government) indicated that smoke detectors may not go off in
as many as 35% of all fires. While fire alarm systems are designed to provide early warning against fire, they do not guarantee warning or protection against fire. A fire alarm system
may not provide timely or adequate warning, or simply may not
function, for a variety of reasons:
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot
reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in or behind walls, on
roofs, or on the other side of closed doors. Smoke detectors
also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second-floor detector, for example, may not sense a
first-floor or basement fire.
Particles of combustion or "smoke" from a developing fire
may not reach the sensing chambers of smoke detectors because:
• Barriers such as closed or partially closed doors, walls, or
chimneys may inhibit particle or smoke flow.
• Smoke particles may become "cold," stratify, and not reach
the ceiling or upper walls where detectors are located.
• Smoke particles may be blown away from detectors by air
outlets.
• Smoke particles may be drawn into air returns before reaching
the detector.
The amount of "smoke" present may be insufficient to alarm
smoke detectors. Smoke detectors are designed to alarm at
various levels of smoke density. If such density levels are not
created by a developing fire at the location of detectors, the
detectors will not go into alarm.
Smoke detectors, even when working properly, have sensing
limitations. Detectors that have photoelectronic sensing
chambers tend to detect smoldering fires better than flaming
fires, which have little visible smoke. Detectors that have ionizing-type sensing chambers tend to detect fast-flaming fires
better than smoldering fires. Because fires develop in different ways and are often unpredictable in their growth, neither
type of detector is necessarily best and a given type of detector may not provide adequate warning of a fire.
Smoke detectors cannot be expected to provide adequate
warning of fires caused by arson, children playing with
matches (especially in bedrooms), smoking in bed, and violent
explosions (caused by escaping gas, improper storage of
flammable materials, etc.).

IMPORTANT! Smoke detectors must be installed in the
same room as the control panel and in rooms used by the
system for the connection of alarm transmission wiring, communications, signaling, and/or power. If detectors are not so
located, a developing fire may damage the alarm system,
crippling its ability to report a fire.
Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people
if these devices are located on the other side of closed or
partly open doors or are located on another floor of a building.
Any warning device may fail to alert people with a disability or
those who have recently consumed drugs, alcohol or medication. Please note that:
• Strobes can, under certain circumstances, cause seizures
in people with conditions such as epilepsy.
• Studies have shown that certain people, even when they
hear a fire alarm signal, do not respond or comprehend the
meaning of the signal. It is the property owner's responsibility to conduct fire drills and other training exercise to
make people aware of fire alarm signals and instruct them
on the proper reaction to alarm signals.
• In rare instances, the sounding of a warning device can
cause temporary or permanent hearing loss.
A fire alarm system will not operate without any electrical
power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby
batteries only for a specified time and only if the batteries
have been properly maintained and replaced regularly.
Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control. It is essential to use only equipment
listed for service with your control panel.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a
premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service
or temporarily disabled. For added protection against telephone line failure, backup radio transmission systems are recommended.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunction is inadequate maintenance. To keep the entire fire alarm system in
excellent working order, ongoing maintenance is required per
the manufacturer's recommendations, and UL and NFPA standards. At a minimum, the requirements of NFPA 72 shall be
followed. Environments with large amounts of dust, dirt or
high air velocity require more frequent maintenance. A maintenance agreement should be arranged through the local
manufacturer's representative. Maintenance should be
scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local
fire codes and should be performed by authorized professional fire alarm installers only. Adequate written records of
all inspections should be kept.

PrecauLarge.PMD

01/10/2005

Installation Precautions

Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free
installation with long-term reliability:

WARNING - Several different sources of power can be connected to the fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources
of power before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards,
modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized.
Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this
manual is read and understood.

Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may
operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to
lightning-induced transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interferences,
proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. Overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended, due to an increased
susceptibility to nearby lightning strikes. Consult with the
Technical Services Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.

CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software
Changes. To ensure proper system operation, this product
must be tested in accordance with NFPA 72 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any change, addition or
deletion of system components, or after any modification,
repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested.
In addition, to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not
directly affected by the change, up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
This system meets NFPA requirements for indoor dry operation at 0-49° C/32-120° F and at a relative humidity of 93 ±2%
RH (non-condensing) at 32 ±2° C/90 ±3° F. However, the
useful life of the system's standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme
temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and all peripherals be installed in
an environment with a nominal room temperature of 15-27°
C/60-80° F.
Verify that wire sizes are adequate for all initiating and
indicating device loops. Refer to manual Specifications section for maximum allowable I.R. drop from the specified device voltage.

Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing,
reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make
all cable entries from the sides or rear. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery, transformer, and printed circuit board location.
Do not tighten screw terminals more than 9 in-lbs.
Over-tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced
terminal contact pressure and difficulty with screw terminal
removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components.
Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that static charges are removed from the
body. Use static-suppressive packaging to protect electronic
assemblies removed from the unit.
Follow the instructions in the installation, operating, and
programming manuals. These instructions must be followed
to avoid damage to the control panel and associated
equipment. FACP operation and reliability depend upon
proper installation by authorized personnel.

FCC Warning
WARNING: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for class A computing
device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules,
which is designed to provide reasonable protection against
such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause interference, in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at their own
expense.

PrecauLarge.PMD

01/10/2005

Canadian Requirements
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A
limits for radiation noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations
of the Canadian Department of Communications.
Le present appareil numerique n'emet pas de bruits
radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux
appareils numeriques de la classe A prescrites dans le
Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le
ministere des Communications du Canada.

Notes

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Table of Contents

SECTION 1: Product Description ........................................................................................................................12
1.1: Features and Options ...................................................................................................................................12
1.2: Specifications ..............................................................................................................................................13
1.2.1: Current Availability...........................................................................................................................15
1.3: Controls and Indicators ...............................................................................................................................16
1.4: Circuits ........................................................................................................................................................17
1.5: Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter ..................................................................................................17
1.6: Components.................................................................................................................................................18
1.6.1: Intelligent Addressable Detectors: Newer Series..............................................................................18
1.6.2: Intelligent Addressable Modules: Newer Series ...............................................................................19
1.6.3: 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices......................................................................................19
1.6.4: Addressable Device Accessories.......................................................................................................19
1.7: Optional Modules ........................................................................................................................................20
1.8: Accessories..................................................................................................................................................20
1.8.1: PK-CD Programming Utility ............................................................................................................20
1.8.2: Dress Panel........................................................................................................................................20
1.8.3: Battery Box .......................................................................................................................................21
1.8.4: Battery Charger .................................................................................................................................21
1.8.4.1 CHG-75 Battery Charger ........................................................................................................21
1.8.4.2 CHG-120F Battery Charger ....................................................................................................21
1.8.5: Annunciators .....................................................................................................................................22
1.9: Getting Started.............................................................................................................................................23
1.10: Telephone Requirements and Warnings ....................................................................................................24
1.10.1: Telephone Circuitry.........................................................................................................................24
1.10.2: Digital Communicator.....................................................................................................................24
1.10.3: Telephone Company Rights and Warnings .....................................................................................25
1.10.4: For Canadian Applications..............................................................................................................26
SECTION 2: Installation .......................................................................................................................................27
2.1: Mounting Backbox ......................................................................................................................................27
2.2: Mounting Transformer ................................................................................................................................28
2.3: Power...........................................................................................................................................................31
2.3.1: AC Power and Earth Ground Connection.........................................................................................31
2.3.2: Battery Power....................................................................................................................................31
2.3.3: Special Application DC Power Output Connection..........................................................................31
2.4: Relays ..........................................................................................................................................................32
2.5: Notification Appliance Circuits ..................................................................................................................32
2.5.1: Configuring NACs ............................................................................................................................33
2.5.2: Style Y (Class B) NAC Wiring .........................................................................................................33
2.5.3: Style Z (Class A) NAC Wiring ........................................................................................................34
2.6: Remote Synchronization Output .................................................................................................................34
2.7: UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements ....................................................................................................35
2.8: Digital Communicator.................................................................................................................................36
2.9: Optional Module Installation ......................................................................................................................37
2.9.1: 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation..........................................................................................38
2.9.2: Printer/PC..........................................................................................................................................40
2.9.3: Digital Communicator and Annunciators .........................................................................................41
2.9.3.1 ACM-8RF Relay Control Module ..........................................................................................41
2.9.3.2 ACS and AFM Series Annunciators .......................................................................................41
SECTION 3: Programming ..................................................................................................................................42
3.1: Programming Data Entry ............................................................................................................................42
3.2: User Programming ......................................................................................................................................43
3.3: Initial Power-up...........................................................................................................................................44
MS-9200UDLS

P/N: 52750:A

11/04/05

Table of Contents

3.4: Programming Screens Description ..............................................................................................................44
3.5: Programming and Passwords ......................................................................................................................44
3.6: Master Programming Level.........................................................................................................................46
3.6.1: Autoprogram .....................................................................................................................................47
3.6.2: Point Program....................................................................................................................................48
3.6.2.1 Detector Programming ............................................................................................................48
3.6.2.1.1 Add Detector ........................................................................................................................48
3.6.2.1.2 Delete Detector .....................................................................................................................49
3.6.2.1.3 Edit Detector ........................................................................................................................49
3.6.2.2 Module Programming .............................................................................................................58
3.6.2.2.1 Add Module .........................................................................................................................58
3.6.2.2.2 Delete Module ......................................................................................................................59
3.6.2.2.3 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module .............................................................................59
3.6.2.2.4 Edit Module Screen for Control Modules ............................................................................68
3.6.3: Zone Setup.........................................................................................................................................75
3.6.3.1 Enable ......................................................................................................................................75
3.6.3.2 Disable .....................................................................................................................................76
3.6.3.3 Zone 97, 98 and 99 ..................................................................................................................76
3.6.3.4 Zones Installed ........................................................................................................................77
3.6.3.5 Zones Enabled .........................................................................................................................77
3.6.3.6 Zones Disabled ........................................................................................................................77
3.6.3.7 Zone Type ...............................................................................................................................78
3.6.3.8 Zones Available ......................................................................................................................79
3.6.4: Loop Setup ........................................................................................................................................79
3.6.4.1 Style .........................................................................................................................................79
3.6.4.2 Loop Protocol ..........................................................................................................................79
3.6.5: System Setup .....................................................................................................................................80
3.6.5.1 Trouble Reminder ...................................................................................................................81
3.6.5.2 Banner .....................................................................................................................................81
3.6.5.3 Time-Date ...............................................................................................................................82
3.6.5.3.1 Time .....................................................................................................................................82
3.6.5.3.2 Date ......................................................................................................................................83
3.6.5.3.3 Clock Format ........................................................................................................................83
3.6.5.3.4 Daylight Savings Time .........................................................................................................83
3.6.5.4 Timers .....................................................................................................................................84
3.6.5.4.1 PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) Delay ................................................................................84
3.6.5.4.2 Pre-signal Delay ...................................................................................................................85
3.6.5.4.3 Waterflow Delay ..................................................................................................................85
3.6.5.4.4 AC Loss Delay .....................................................................................................................86
3.6.5.5 NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit) ....................................................................................86
3.6.5.5.1 Enabled .................................................................................................................................87
3.6.5.5.2 Type ......................................................................................................................................88
3.6.5.5.3 Silenceable ...........................................................................................................................88
3.6.5.5.4 Auto Silence .........................................................................................................................89
3.6.5.5.5 Coding (only for NACs not programmed as Sync Strobe Type) .........................................89
3.6.5.5.6 Zone ......................................................................................................................................91
3.6.5.5.7 Silence Inhibited ...................................................................................................................91
3.6.5.5.8 Sync Type .............................................................................................................................91
3.6.5.6 Relays ......................................................................................................................................92
3.6.5.7 Canadian Option ......................................................................................................................93
3.6.5.8 Waterflow Silenceable ............................................................................................................93
3.6.6: Verify Loop .......................................................................................................................................93
3.6.7: History ...............................................................................................................................................94
3.6.7.1 View Events ............................................................................................................................94
3.6.7.2 Erase History ...........................................................................................................................94
3.6.8: Walktest .............................................................................................................................................95
6

MS-9200UDLS

P/N: 52750:A

11/04/05

Table of Contents

3.6.9: Option Modules................................................................................................................................96
3.6.9.1 Annunciators/UDACT ............................................................................................................96
3.6.9.2 Onboard DACT .......................................................................................................................97
3.6.9.2.1 Onboard DACT Enable ........................................................................................................97
3.6.9.2.2 Primary Phone ......................................................................................................................98
3.6.9.2.3 Secondary Phone ..................................................................................................................98
3.6.9.2.4 Service Terminal ..................................................................................................................99
3.6.9.2.5 Central Station ......................................................................................................................101
3.6.9.2.6 Trouble Call Limit (Dialer Runaway Prevention) ...............................................................102
3.6.9.2.7 Manual Dial Mode ...............................................................................................................114
3.6.9.3 Printer/PC ................................................................................................................................115
3.6.10: Password Change ............................................................................................................................116
3.6.11: Clear Program .................................................................................................................................117
3.6.12: Program Check................................................................................................................................118
3.7: Maintenance Programming Level ...............................................................................................................120
3.7.1: Disable Point .....................................................................................................................................121
3.7.2: History...............................................................................................................................................122
3.7.3: Program Check..................................................................................................................................123
3.7.4: Walktest.............................................................................................................................................124
3.7.5: System ...............................................................................................................................................124
3.7.6: Zone Setup ........................................................................................................................................126
SECTION 4: Operating Instructions ....................................................................................................................128
4.1: Panel Control Buttons .................................................................................................................................128
4.1.1: Acknowledge/Step ............................................................................................................................128
4.1.2: Alarm Silence....................................................................................................................................128
4.1.3: Drill/Hold 2 Sec ................................................................................................................................128
4.1.4: Reset..................................................................................................................................................128
4.2: LED Indicators ............................................................................................................................................129
4.3: Normal Operation........................................................................................................................................130
4.4: Trouble Operation .......................................................................................................................................130
4.5: Alarm Operation..........................................................................................................................................132
4.6: Supervisory Operation.................................................................................................................................133
4.7: Process Monitor Operation..........................................................................................................................134
4.8: Hazard/Tornado Condition Operation .........................................................................................................134
4.9: Medical Alert Condition Operation.............................................................................................................134
4.10: NAC Operation .........................................................................................................................................134
4.11: Programmed Zone Operation ....................................................................................................................135
4.12: Disable/Enable Operation .........................................................................................................................135
4.13: Waterflow Circuits Operation ...................................................................................................................135
4.14: Detector Functions ....................................................................................................................................135
4.15: Time Functions: Real-Time Clock ............................................................................................................135
4.16: Synchronized NAC Operation ..................................................................................................................136
4.17: Coded Operation .......................................................................................................................................136
4.18: Presignal ....................................................................................................................................................136
4.19: Positive Alarm Sequence ..........................................................................................................................137
4.20: Special System Timers ..............................................................................................................................138
4.20.1: Silence Inhibit Timer.......................................................................................................................138
4.20.2: Autosilence Timer ...........................................................................................................................138
4.20.3: Trouble Reminder ...........................................................................................................................138
4.20.4: Waterflow Retard Timer..................................................................................................................138
4.20.5: Alarm Verification (None or One Minute)......................................................................................139
4.21: Walktest .....................................................................................................................................................139
4.22: Read Status ................................................................................................................................................140
4.22.1: System Point ...................................................................................................................................141

MS-9200UDLS

P/N: 52750:A

11/04/05

Table of Contents

4.22.2: Zones ...............................................................................................................................................142
4.22.3: Power...............................................................................................................................................143
4.22.4: Trouble Reminder............................................................................................................................144
4.22.5: Timers..............................................................................................................................................144
4.22.6: NAC ................................................................................................................................................145
4.22.7: Relays ..............................................................................................................................................145
4.22.8: Program Check................................................................................................................................146
4.22.9: History .............................................................................................................................................146
4.22.10: Annunciators .................................................................................................................................147
4.22.11: Phone Line.....................................................................................................................................147
4.22.12: Central Station...............................................................................................................................148
4.22.13: Service Terminal............................................................................................................................149
4.22.14: Printer/PC ......................................................................................................................................149
4.22.15: Print ...............................................................................................................................................150
4.22.16: Time-Date......................................................................................................................................152
SECTION 5: Central Station Communications ...................................................................................................153
5.1: Transmittal Priorities ...................................................................................................................................156
SECTION 6: Remote Site Upload/Download .......................................................................................................158
6.1: Downloading Program.................................................................................................................................158
6.1.1: Security Features ...............................................................................................................................159
6.2: Downloading Initiated at a Service Terminal ..............................................................................................161
6.3: Uploading Initiated at a Service Terminal...................................................................................................162
SECTION 7: Power Supply Calculations .............................................................................................................163
7.1: Overview .....................................................................................................................................................163
7.2: Calculating the AC Branch Circuit..............................................................................................................163
7.3: Calculating the System Current Draw.........................................................................................................164
7.3.1: Overview ...........................................................................................................................................164
7.3.2: How to Use Table 7.3 on page 165 to Calculate System Current Draw ...........................................164
7.4: Calculating the Battery Size ........................................................................................................................166
7.4.1: NFPA Battery Requirements .............................................................................................................166
7.4.2: Selecting and Locating Batteries.......................................................................................................166
APPENDIX A: Software Zones ............................................................................................................................167
A.1: Correlations ...............................................................................................................................................167
APPENDIX B: Default Programming .................................................................................................................173
APPENDIX C: NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements ...................................................................................174
APPENDIX D: Wire Requirements .....................................................................................................................178
APPENDIX E: HVAC Control .............................................................................................................................179
E.1: Control Module Operation .........................................................................................................................179
E.1.1: HVAC SHUTDN .............................................................................................................................179
E.2: Monitor Module Operation ........................................................................................................................179
E.2.1: HVAC RESTART ...........................................................................................................................179
E.2.2: HVAC OVRRIDE ...........................................................................................................................180

MS-9200UDLS

P/N: 52750:A

11/04/05

It is imperative that the installer understand the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ) and be familiar with the standards set forth by the following regulatory agencies:
•
•
•

Underwriters Laboratories Standards
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
CAN/ULC - S527-99 Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems

Before proceeding, the installer should be familiar with the following documents.
NFPA Standards
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
Underwriters Laboratories Documents:
UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
UL 228 Door Closers–Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units
UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances
UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired
CAN/ULC - S524-01 Standard for Installation of Fire Alarm Systems
Other:
EIA-232E Serial Interface Standard
EIA-485 Serial Interface Standard
NEC Article 250 Grounding
NEC Article 300 Wiring Methods
NEC Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Applicable Local and State Building Codes
Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (LAHJ)
Fire-Lite Documents:
Fire-LiteDevice Compatibility
SLC Wiring Manual
AFM-16ATF & AFM-32AF
AFM-16AF Annunciator
ACS Series Annunciators
CHG-120F Battery Charger
CHG-75 Battery Charger
LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules
LCD-80F Remote Fire Annunciator
ACM-8RF Relay Control Module

Document #15384
Document #51309
Document #15970
Document #15210
Document #51480
Document #50888
Document #51315
Document #50055
Document #51338
Document #50362

This product has been certified to comply with the requirements in the Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire
Alarm Systems, UL 864, 9th Edition. Operation of this product with products not tested for UL 864, 9th Edition has not
been evaluated. Such operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

10
2
1

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

HIGH VOLTAGE

J10

TRANSFORMER 1

CAUTION!

2
1

J11

TRANSFORMER 2

Transformer 1 Connector

Transformer 2 Connector

Important! Removing Ground
Fault Disable Jumper JP7
voids UL/NFPA Style/Class
identifications for circuits.
Remove jumper JP7 only
with the approval of the AHJ
(Authority Having Jurisdiction)

Nonresettable or Resettable Power
Jumper selectable by JP4, 24 VDC filtered,
power-limited (0.500 amps maximum)
Supervision required. Nonresettable
Power suitable for powering annunciators,
Resettable Power suitable for powering
smoke detectors..

Resettable Power - 24 VDC filtered, power-limited
(0.500 amps maximum) to smoke detectors (IDC).
Supervision required.

Nonsupervised, power-limited circuits
Supervise with a power supervision relay A77-716B

1
2
3

JP4

4
3

NAC #4

120 VAC, 60 HZ, 3.0 amps
220/240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5 amps

- +

BATTERY

24 VDC, supervised,
nonpower-limited
18 Amp Hour maximum

Battery

Remove this jumper
to disable the FACP
battery charger when
using external charger.

To disable ground fault detection,
remove jumper/shunt from JP7

JP7

REMOVE TO
DISABLE GND. FLT.

Configure NACs for Class A or
Class B wiring using NACKEY
card. Factory default is Class B.

B+ A+ A- B2B+ 4B+ 4B- 2BNAC 2 CLASS A
NAC 2 & 4 CLASS B
RELAY 1

JP2

RELAY 2

NO NC C

TB6

NC NO C

Trouble

O
O
U I U I
T N T N
+ + - -

PS2 Keyboard Interface

MINI DIN
KEYBOARD CONN.

KEYPAD
I/F

ACS

TB10 SLC
B+

4XTMF

CUT TO
MONITOR
4XTMF

JP3

KISSOFF

(Nonpower-Limited)

DACT Phone Line Jacks

SEC. PHONE LINE

J12

SEC. ACTIVE

PRI. PHONE LINE

J13

PRI. ACTIVE

Cut this jumper to supervise
the 4XTMF module when
installed (see J5 & J6)

shield
SHIELD

A+ B- A-

SLC SLC SLC

B A B A A B
+ + - -

(supervised)
Refer to the SLC Wiring
Manual for detailed
information on wiring
addressable devices
for Style 4, 6 and 7.

SLC Loop

Cut this jumper to enable
Supervisory relay when
4XTMF module is installed

Flash Memory Load Enable Switch.
UP is normal position for switch.
SW1 DOWN position allows loading of
factory software upgrades.

RELAY 3

TB7 NO
TB5 NO NC

NO NC C

NC C

Alarm*
NO NC C

Supervisory*

(*Factory default relay programming)

TERM
(EIA-485)
to LCD-80F

(nonsupervised)
For EDP-listed equipment or
personal computer with FACP
Upload/Download Utility.
50 foot maximum within same room.

EIA-232
to printer or
personal computer

ACS (EIA-485)
to ACS Annunc.
(power-limited,
supervised)

TB8 OUT+ IN+ OUT- IN- TB9

Contacts shown below in normal
condition (AC power with no alarm,
trouble or supervisory activity).

Nonsupervised relay contacts
Contact Ratings:
2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive)
0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive)

2 Programmable Relays &
1 Fixed Trouble Relay

ELRs 4.7K, ½W

A Fail Safe Trouble NC NO C
relay switches to the
NO position during
trouble conditions and
under loss of all power.

NAC #2

B B B B
+ + - NAC
2 4 4 2 Number
TB4

B+ A+ A- B1B+ 3B+ 3B- 1BNAC 1 CLASS A
NAC 1 & 3 CLASS B

TB3

B B B B
+ + - 1 3 3 1

NAC #3

LCD DISPLAY

JP6

HOT NEUT EARTH

TB11

+ -

NAC #1

REMOTE PWR
SUPPLY SYNC

TB2

JP5

+ 24V - + 24V NON-RST RST
POWER POWER

TB1

Notification Appliance Circuits
NAC #1, #2, #3 & #4, Style Y (Class B) (Supervised, Power Limited)
(Special Application) 2.5 amps max. per circuit. JP6 configured
for Class B using NACKEY card.
(See Style Z illustrated near right edge of board).

Special Application DC Power Outputs (24 VDC)

Special Application Power
24 VDC filtered, supervised and power-limited.
0.040 amps maximum, follows NAC1 control circuit.
Requires 4.7kohm End-of-Line resistor.

Remote Synchronization Output

Basic System Connections

CAUTION!

HIGH VOLTAGE

11/04/05

Red
White
Green
Black

DB9F

9 8 7 6

5 4 3 2 1

TR D G
XC T N
V R D

TB3

B A A B
+ + - -

TB4

B A A B
+ + - -

NAC #2
+

NAC #1 & #2
Style Z (Class A) (Supervised, Power Limited)
2.5 amps max. per circuit.
JP6 configured for Class A
using NACKEY card.
NAC #1

TB8
TB8 (option to DB-25)

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6

TB8

Notification Appliance Circuits

T R D G
X C T N
V R D

Peripheral Devices and Their Documents:

AFM-16ATF &
AFM-32AF
Doc. #15970

ACM-8RF
Doc. #50362

ACS Series
51480

ACS (EIA-485)
Annunciators

AFM-16AF
Doc. #15210

LCD-80F
Doc. #51338

SLC Loop
Addressable Devices and SLC Wiring
Doc. #51309

92udperi.cdr

TERM (EIA-485)
Annunciators

LDM-32F
Doc. #50055

Battery Connector

CHG-120F Charger
Doc. #50888

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

CHG-75 Charger
Doc. # 51315

Product Description

Features and Options

Product Description

SECTION 1

The Fire-LiteMS-9200UDLS is a combination FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) and
DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) all on one circuit board. This
compact, cost effective, intelligent addressable control panel has an extensive list of
powerful features. The combination of Fire-Lite’s newer series devices and legacy 300
Series devices, along with the MS-9200UDLS FACP, offer the latest in fire protection
technology. The power supply and all electronics are contained on a single circuit
board housed in a metal cabinet, providing a complete fire control system for most
applications. Optional modules, which plug into the main circuit board, are available
for special functions. Available accessories include LED, graphic and LCD
annunciators, reverse polarity/city box transmitter, local and remote upload/download
software and remote power expansion.
The integral DACT transmits system status (alarms, troubles, AC loss, etc.) to a Central
Station via the public switched telephone network. It also allows remote and local
programming of the control panel using the PK-CD Upload/Download utility. In
addition, the control panel may be programmed or interrogated off-site via the public
switched telephone network. Any personal computer with Windows™ 95 or greater,
and compatible modem with a speed of 14.4 kbps or faster and Fire•Lite Upload/
Download software kit PK-CD, may serve as a Service Terminal. This allows
download of the entire program or upload of the entire program, history file, walktest
data, current status and system voltages.
MS-9200UDLS is used in this manual to refer to both the MS-9200UDLS and the MS9200UDLSE FACPs (Fire Alarm Control Panels).
Inventory
When the MS-9200UDLS shipment is received, check to make certain that all parts
have been included in the shipment. The MS-9200UDLS shipment should consist of
one of each of the following:
main circuit board with display
backbox with door
plastic bag containing screws, cables, key, etc.
manual

1.1 Features and Options
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

New LiteSpeed™ polling protocol for faster SLC response time
SLC operates up to 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) with twisted, unshielded wire (refer to
"Wire Requirements" on page 178)
Built-in DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter)
Single addressable SLC loop which meets NFPA Style 4, 6 and 7 requirements
198 addressable device capacity (99 detectors and 99 control/relay/monitor
modules)
99 software zones
Onboard NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits) which can be configured as
four Style Y (Class B) or two Style Z (Class A) circuits - special application
3.0 amps total power for NACs and 24 VDC special application auxiliary power
outputs expandable to 6.0 amps
3.6 amps total system power (includes battery charger) expandable to 6.6 amps
Two programmable relay outputs and one fixed trouble relay
Synchronization output for remote power supply applications (special
application)
Built-in Programmer

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Specifications

Product Description
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Telephone Line Active LEDs
Communication Confirmation (Kissoff) LED
Touchtone/Rotary dialing
Programmable Make/Break Ratio
EIA-232 Printer/PC interface (variable baud rate)
80-character LCD display (backlit)
Real-time clock/calendar with daylight savings time control
History file with 1,000 event capacity
Advanced fire technology features:
Automatic drift compensation
Maintenance alert
Detector sensitivity test capability (NFPA 72 compliant)
Automatic device type-code verification
Point trouble identification
Waterflow selection per module point
Alarm verification selection per detector point
Walktest, silent or audible
PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) and Pre-signal per point (NFPA 72 compliant)
Silence inhibit timer option per NAC
Autosilence timer option per NAC
Continuous, March Time, Temporal or California code for main circuit board
NACs with two-stage capability
Selectable strobe synchronization per NAC
Remote Acknowledge, Alarm Silence, Reset and Drill via addressable modules,
AFM annunciators or LCD-80F Remote annunciator
Auto-program (learn mode) reduces installation time. Reports two devices set to
the same address
Password and key-protected nonvolatile memory
User programmable password
Fully programmable from local keypad or optional keyboard
Upload/Download (local or remote) of program and data via integral DACT
Compatible with Fire-Lite’s newer series devices (refer to SLC Wiring Manual
for a list of compatible addressable devices)
Compatible with legacy Fire-Lite 300 Series devices in CLIP mode only (refer to
the SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable devices)

•

Optional 4XTMF module (conventional reverse polarity/city box transmitter)

•

Annunciators:
ACS Series-LED Zone Annunciators
LDM Graphic Annunciator Series
LCD-80F Liquid Crystal Display point annunciator
ACM-8RF Relay Module

1.2 Specifications
Refer to Illustration on page 10 for terminal locations and connections.
AC Power - TB11
MS-9200UDLS: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 3.0 amps
MS-9200UDLSE: 240 VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5 amps
Wire size: minimum 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) with 600 V insulation

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Product Description

Specifications
Battery (Lead Acid Only) - J9
Maximum Charging Circuit: Normal Flat Charge - 27.6 VDC @ 0.80 amp
Maximum Battery Charger Capacity: 18 Amp Hour (MS-9200UDLS cabinet holds
maximum of two 18 Amp Hour batteries. For greater than 25 Amp Hour up to 120
Amp Hour batteries, use the CHG-75 or CHG-120F Battery Charger and BB-55F
Battery Box.
Note: Jumper JP5, on the FACP main circuit board, must be removed to disable the
FACP battery charger when using an external battery charger.
Communication Loop - TB10
24 VDC nominal, 27.6 VDC maximum
Maximum length is 10,000 ft. (3,000 m) total twisted, shielded pair length or 3,000 ft.
(900 m) untwisted, unshielded pair length
Maximum loop current is 400 mA (short circuit) or 100 mA (normal)
Maximum loop resistance is 40 ohms
Supervised and power-limited circuit requires ferrite bead per FCC requirement
Refer to SLC Loop manual for wiring information
Notification Appliance Circuits - TB3 & TB4
Each Terminal Block provides connections for two Style Y (Class B) or one Style Z
(Class A) for a total of Four Style Y (Class B) or two Style Z (Class A) NACs
Style is configured using NACKEY card plugged into JP6 on main board
Special Application full-wave rectified power
Power-limited circuitry
Maximum voltage drop in wiring: 2.0 VDC
Nominal operating voltage: 24 VDC
Current-limit: fuseless, electronic, power-limited circuitry
Maximum signaling current per circuit: 2.5 amps (see Figure 1.1 on page 15)
End-of-Line Resistor: 4.7 kΩ, ½ watt (P/N 71252 UL listed) for Style Y (Class B) NAC
Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices
Two Programmable Relays and One Fixed Trouble Relay - TB5, TB6 & TB7
Contact rating: 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive), 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive)
Form-C relays
Refer to Figure 2.6 on page 32 for information on power-limited relay circuit wiring
Nonresettable Special Application Power (24 VDC Nominal) TB1, Terminals 1 (+) & 2 (-)
Jumper selectable (JP4) for conversion to resettable power output
Maximum ripple voltage: 10mVRMS
Total DC current available from each output is up to 0.5 amps (see Figure 1.1)
Power-limited circuit requires ferrite bead per FCC requirements
Four-Wire Resettable Special Application Smoke Detector Power (24 VDC
nominal) - TB3, Terminals 3 (+) & 4 (-)
Maximum ripple voltage: 10 mVRMS
Up to 0.5 amps is available for powering 4-wire smoke detectors (see Figure 1.1)
Power-limited circuit requires ferrite bead per FCC requirements
Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for listed compatible devices
Remote Sync Output - TB2
Remote power supply synchronization output
24 VDC nominal special application power
Maximum current is 40 mA
End-of-Line Resistor: 4.7KΩ
Output linked to NAC 1 control
Supervised and power-limited circuit requires ferrite bead per FCC requirements

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Specifications

Product Description
EIA-485 (TERM) or EIA-232 (ACS) - TB8
EIA-485 Terminal Mode annunciator connections: Terminal 1 (Out +), 2 (In +),
3 (Out -), 4 (In -)
EIA-232 PC/Printer applications connections: Terminal 1 (Transmit), 2 (Receive),
3 (Ground)
EIA-485 (ACS) - TB9
ACS annunciator connector, Terminal 1 (+) and Terminal 2 (-), requires ferrite bead

1.2.1 Current Availability
The following figure illustrates the maximum current that is possible for each panel
circuit and the total current available from the FACP with optional second transformer.

Refer to the battery calculations section for additional information.
Figure 1.1 Current Availability

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

6.0 amps with optional second
XRM-24(E) transformer.
3.0 amps max. with only
standard transformer installed.

owerdist9200ud.cdr

Note: If NACs are
configured as two Style Z
(Class A) circuits, each
circuit can handle 2.5
amps maximum.

Product Description

Controls and Indicators

1.3 Controls and Indicators
LCD Display
The FACP uses an 80-character
HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY
(4 lines X 20 characters) high
viewing angle LCD display. The
SYSTEM ALL NORMAL
display includes a long life LED
10:00A 012102
backlight that remains illuminated. If
AC power is lost and the system is
not in alarm, the LED backlight will turn off to conserve batteries.
LED Indicators
LED indicators are provided to annunciate the following conditions:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

AC Power (green)
Fire Alarm (red)
Supervisory (yellow)
Trouble (yellow)
Maintenance/presignal (yellow)
Alarm Silenced signals (yellow)
Disabled (yellow)
Battery fault (yellow)
Ground fault (yellow)

Key Panel
Mounted on the main circuit board, the key panel includes a window for the LCD
display and LED indicators as listed above. The key panel, which is visible with the
cabinet door closed, has 25 keys, including a 16 key alpha-numeric pad similar to a
telephone keypad.
Function keys:
Acknowledge/Step
Alarm Silence
Drill
Reset (lamp test)

Service/program keys:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

AC POWER

MAINTENANCE

FIRE ALARM

ALARM
SILENCED

SUPERVISORY

DISABLED

TROUBLE

BATTERY
GROUND

1
4

ACK/STEP

1st

3
DEF

ABC

EVENT

ALARM
SILENCE

CLR

Keys labeled 1 to 9
7
8
9
* key
# key
0
#
*
-/.
0 (recall) key
1st Event key
Figure 1.2 Membrane/Display Panel
Clear key
Escape key
Mode key
Four cursor keys (up, down, left and right)
Enter key
GHI

JKL

MNO

PRS

TUV

WXY

ENTER

ESC

DRILL

HOLD 2 SEC

MODE

RESET

RECALL

9600kypd.cdr

•
•
•
•

Local Piezo Sounder
A piezo sounder provides separate and distinct pulse rates for alarm, trouble and
supervisory conditions.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Circuits

Product Description

1.4 Circuits
SLC Communication Loop
One SLC loop is provided standard on the FACP main circuit board. The SLC loop,
configurable for NFPA Style 4, 6 or 7, provides communication to addressable
detectors, monitor (initiating device) and control (output device) modules. Refer to the
SLC Wiring manual for information on wiring devices.
Reference
Manual

Output Circuits
The following output circuits are available on the FACP:
•

•

Special Application Power
24 VDC Resettable (smoke detector power) output - 0.5 amps maximum
24 VDC Nonresettable or Resettable power output - 0.5 amps maximum
24 VDC Battery Charger (up to 18 AH batteries)

NAC (Notification Appliance Circuits)
NACs configurable for four Style Y (Class B) or two Style Z (Class A) using NACKEY
card in JP6, are provided with various programmable features.
Relays
One fixed and two fully programmable Form-C dry contact relays are provided. The
fixed fail-safe relay monitors system trouble and the two programmable relays are
factory default programmed for system alarm and system supervisory. Contacts are
rated 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive) and 0.5 amps @ 30 VAC (resistive). The
programmable relays can be programmed for the following operations:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

fire alarm
trouble
supervisory
supervisory auto-resettable
DACT communication failure
process monitor
process monitor auto-resettable
hazard alert
medical alert
AC loss

1.5 Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter
Two modular phone jacks allow easy connection to telephone lines. Modular jacks are
labeled PH1 for Primary Phone Line and PH2 for Secondary Phone Line. Two
telephone line active red LEDs are provided as well as a green Kissoff LED. The
integral digital communicator provides the following functions:
•
•
•
•
•
•

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Line Seizure: takes control of the phone lines disconnecting any premises phones
Off/On Hook: performs on and off-hook status to the phone lines
Listen for dial tone: 440 Hz tone typical in most networks
Dialing the Central Station(s) number: default is Touch-Tone®, programmable to
rotary
For tone burst or touchtone type formats: discern proper Ack and Kissoff tone(s).
The frequency and time duration of the tone(s) varies with the transmission
format. The control panel will adjust accordingly.
Communicate in the following formats:
12 Tone Burst types: 20 pps
(3+1, 4+1, 4+2, 3+1 Exp., 4+1 Exp., 4+2 Exp.)
3 Touchtone Types
4+1 Ademco Express
4+2 Ademco Express
Ademco Contact ID

Product Description

Components

1.6 Components
Main Circuit Board
The main circuit board contains the system’s CPU, power supply, other primary
components and wiring interface connectors. The 4XTMF option module plugs in and
is mounted to the main circuit board.
See Page

Cabinet
The MS-9200UDLS backbox provides space for two batteries (up to 18 Amp Hour).
Ample knockouts are provided for system wiring. Also available is an optional dress
panel (DP-9692), which mounts to the inside of the cabinet (required by ULC for
Canadian installations). The dress panel must be installed to meet FM requirements.
Transformer Assembly

The MS-9200UDLS cabinet provides space
for two batteries (up to 18 Amp Hour).
Batteries larger than 18 Amp Hour require an
external charger such as the CHG-75 or
CHG-120F and a UL listed battery box such
as the BB-55F. Batteries must be ordered
separately.

Battery Cable P/N 75287

9200batt.cdr

9200xfor.cdr

Batteries

Standard
XRM-24(E)

One 100VA transformer is provided standard
with the panel (3.6 amps maximum). An
optional 100 VA transformer XRM-24
(XRM-24E for the MS-9200UDLSE) is
available to provide maximum system and
accessory power (6.6 amp total).

Optional
XRM-24(E)

1.6.1 Intelligent Addressable Detectors: Newer Series
Intelligent, addressable detectors provide information to the control panel on an SLC
Signaling Line Circuit (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for detailed information on
device installation, wiring and operation). This allows the control panel to continually
process the information to determine the status (alarm, trouble, maintenance or normal)
of each detector. Each detector responds to an SLC address that is set in the detector
head using built-in rotary decimal switches. The maximum address cannot exceed
address 99. Note that a blinking LED on an intelligent detector indicates
communication between the detector and the control panel.
These devices (350 Series or newer) can operate in CLIP mode (Classic Loop Interface
Protocol) or LiteSpeed mode to provide a quicker response. They are also compatible
with older 300 Series devices. If a mix of old and new series devices are installed on
the same loop, the FACP must be programmed to operate in CLIP mode. Refer to the
SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable detectors.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Components

Product Description

1.6.2 Intelligent Addressable Modules: Newer Series
The newer series of Control Modules and Monitor Modules provide an interface
between the control panel and conventional notification and initiating devices. Each
module can be set to respond to an address with built-in rotary switches. The maximum
address cannot exceed address 99. Note that a blinking LED on an addressable module
indicates communication between the module and the control panel.
Reference
Manual

These devices (350 Series or newer) can operate in CLIP mode (Classic Loop Interface
Protocol) or LiteSpeed mode to provide a quicker response. They are also compatible
with older 300 series devices. If a mix of old and new series devices are installed on the
same loop, the FACP must be programmed to operate in CLIP mode. Refer to the SLC
Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable modules. Refer to the Device
Compatibility Document for a list of approved conventional notification and initiating
devices.

1.6.3 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices
Fire-Lite’s 300 Series Intelligent Addressable Devices are fully compatible with the
MS-9200UDLS FACP. The address of 300 Series devices cannot be set above 99.
Refer to the SLC Wiring Manual for a list of compatible addressable devices.

1.6.4 Addressable Device Accessories
End-of-Line Resistor Assembly
The End-of-Line resistors are included with each module. Refer to the specific module
documentation for specific information.
Power Supervision Relay
The UL listed End-of-Line power supervision relay is used to supervise the power to 4wire smoke detectors and notification appliances.
N-ELR Mounting Plate
The N-ELR is a single End-of-Line resistor plate which is required for use in Canada.
An ELR, which is supplied with each module and fire alarm control panel, is mounted
to the ELR plate. Resistors mounted to the N-ELR plate can be used for the supervision
of a monitor and control module circuit.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Product Description

Optional Modules

1.7 Optional Modules
The MS-9200UDLS main circuit board includes option module connectors for the
following module:
4XTMF Transmitter Module
The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for local energy municipal box transmitter,
alarm and trouble reverse polarity. It includes a disable switch and disable trouble
LED. A jumper on the module is used to select an option which allows the reverse
polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists.
The module plugs into connectors J5 and J6 which are located near the right edge the
main circuit board. When the 4XTMF module is installed, Jumper JP3, on the main
circuit board, must be cut to allow supervision of the module.

1.8 Accessories
1.8.1 PK-CD Programming Utility
The PK-CD Programming Utility can be used to program an MS-9200UDLS directly
from most IBM compatible computers, including laptops and portables, equipped with
a serial port. MS-9200UDLS program files can also be created and stored on the PC
and then downloaded to the control panel. The PK-CD Kit includes the MS9200UDLS Windows-based Programming Utility software on CD-ROM with on-line
help file. A serial cable (P/N: PRT/PK-CABLE), which must be purchased separately,
is required for connection of the PC to the RS-232 (PC/Printer) terminals at TB8 of the
MS-9200UDLS main circuit board. Refer to the illustration on page 10 and the section
titled "Printer/PC" on page 40, for the location and connections to this terminal.

1.8.2 Dress Panel

dp9200udls.cdr

An optional dress panel DP-9692 is available for the MS-9200UDLS (required by ULC
for Canadian installations). The dress panel restricts access to the system wiring while
allowing access to the key panel. A ground strap must be connected between the stud
on the inside of the dress panel and the ground stud in the backbox. The dress panel
must be installed to meet FM requirements.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Accessories

Product Description

1.8.3 Battery Box
BB-26
The BB-26 battery box may be used to house up to two 26 AH batteries and the
CHG-75 Battery Charger. The battery box, which is red and is provided with
knockouts, was designed specifically to compliment mounting below the FACP.
BB-55F
The BB-55F battery box may be used to house two 25 AH batteries, two 60 AH
batteries or one 100 AH battery. When the CHG-120F is mounted in the BB-55F, two
25 AH or one 60 AH battery may also be housed in the battery box.

1.8.4 Battery Charger
1.8.4.1 CHG-75 Battery Charger
The CHG-75 is capable of charging up to 75 AH lead-acid batteries with the MS9200UDLS FACP. The FACP battery charger must be disabled, by removing
jumper JP5, when using the CHG-75. The charger and up to 26 AH batteries can be
housed in the BB-26 battery box. Larger batteries and the charger can be housed in
the BB-55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control
panel. Refer to the CHG-75 Manual for additional information.

1.8.4.2 CHG-120F Battery Charger

Reference
Manual

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

The CHG-120F is capable of charging up to 120 AH lead-acid batteries with the
MS-9200UDLS FACP. The FACP battery charger must be disabled, by removing
jumper JP5, when using the CHG-120F. The batteries and charger can be housed in
the BB-55F battery box which can be mounted up to 20 feet away from the control
panel. Note that when using the BB-55F for housing the charger and batteries
greater than 25AH, multiple BB-55Fs are required. Refer to the CHG-120F Manual
for additional information.

11/04/05

Product Description

Accessories

1.8.5 Annunciators
ACS Series LED Zone Type Annunciators
The ACS Series Annunciators remotely display alarm and trouble status as well as
system status. In addition, they can provide remote Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and
Drill functions. For more detailed information, refer to the appropriate annunciator
manual. Following is a list of annunciators which can be used with the MS9200UDLS.
Reference
Manual

•

•
•

•

•
•

•

ACM-16ATF* Annunciator Control Module annunciates 16 zones with 16 red
alarm LEDs and 16 yellow trouble LEDs. In addition, it has a System Trouble
LED, an On Line/Power LED and a local piezo sounder. It also has switches for
FACP Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and Drill. It has rotary address switches and
will accept up to three AEM-16ATF Expanders. In Canada, this module must be
used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only.
AEM-16ATF Annunciator Expander Module annunciates 16 zones with 16 red
alarm LEDs and 16 yellow trouble LEDs
AFM-16ATF* Annunciator Fixed Module annunciates 16 zones with 16 red
alarm LEDs and 16 yellow trouble LEDs. In addition, it has a System Trouble
LED, an On Line/Power LED and a local piezo sounder. It also has switches for
FACP Acknowledge, Silence, Reset and Drill. It is fixed at address ‘1.’ In
Canada, this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones
only.
ACM-32AF* Annunciator Control Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32
red LEDs. In addition, it has a System Trouble LED, an On Line/Power LED
and a local piezo sounder. It also has a switch for local piezo silence. It has
rotary address switches and will accept one AEM-32AF Expander. In Canada,
this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input points/zones only.
AEM-32AF Annunciator Expander Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32
red LEDs
AFM-16AF* Annunciator Fixed Module annunciates 16 alarm zones with 16 red
alarm LEDs. In addition, it has a System Trouble LED, an On Line/Power LED
and a local piezo sounder. It also has a switch for local piezo silence. It is fixed
at address ‘1.’ In Canada, this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm
input points/zones only.
AFM-32AF* Annunciator Fixed Module annunciates 32 alarm zones with 32 red
LEDs. In Canada, this module must be used to annunciate the fire alarm input
points/zones only.

* In Canada, the color red must be used to indicate active alarm inputs. Yellow
indicates supervisory, burglary or trouble signals. Green indicates the presence of
power, or an activated output.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Getting Started

Product Description
LCD-80F Remote Fire Annunciator
The LCD-80F annunciator is a compact 80-character backlit LCD remote fire
annunciator that is capable of displaying English language text. It mimics the display
on the control panel and will annunciate device type, point alarm, trouble or
supervisory condition, zone assignment plus any custom alpha labels programmed into
the FACP. The annunciator also provides system status LEDs to display AC Power,
Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory and Alarm Silenced conditions. Additionally, the LCD80F is capable of remotely performing critical system functions such as Acknowledge,
Silence, Reset and Drill.

Reference
Manual

Communications between the control panel and the annunciator is accomplished over a
serial interface employing the EIA-485 communication standard. Up to 32 LCD-80F
annunciators may be connected to the EIA-485 circuit. The annunciators may be
powered from the host FACP or a remote UL listed filtered power supply such as the
FCPS Series. For more detailed information, refer to the LCD-80F manual.
LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules (Graphic Annunciator)
The LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules, which consist of the LDM-32F master and
LDM-E32F expander modules, are used to provide an interface to a custom graphic
LED annunciator. The master module provides power and control for a maximum of
three expander modules. The LDM-32F and LDM-E32F have output connectors which
are used to drive lamps or LEDs and input connectors which are used for remote switch
functions. Refer to the LDM Series Lamp Driver Modules manual for a complete
description.

1.9 Getting Started
The following is a brief summary of the minimal steps involved in bringing an MS9200UDLS on-line:

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

•

Install Backbox and Main Circuit Board (refer to "Mounting Backbox" on page
27)

•

Address and Install Intelligent Devices (refer to the SLC Wiring Manual)

•

Enter Autoprogramming (refer to "Autoprogram" on page 47)

•

Resolve Programming Conflicts

•

Go to Point Program to Enter Specific Data (refer to "Point Program" on page
48). Use the right and left arrow keys to navigate between devices.

11/04/05

Product Description

Telephone Requirements and Warnings

1.10 Telephone Requirements and Warnings
1.10.1 Telephone Circuitry
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) = 0.0B
AC Impedance: 10.0 Mega Ohm
Complies with FCC Part 68
Mates with RJ31X Male Connector
Supervision Threshold: less than 4.0 volts for 2 minutes
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs
should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to
determine the maximum REN for the calling area.

1.10.2 Digital Communicator
Before connecting the control panel to the public switched telephone network, the
installation of two RJ31X jacks is necessary. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please contact:
Manufacturer:

Fire•Lite Alarms, Inc.
One Fire-Lite Place
Northford, CT 06472
(203) 484-7161

Product Model Number: MS-9200UDLS
FCC Registration Number: US:1W6AL00B9200UD
Ringer Equivalence: 0.0B
Note: This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the inside of the FACP door is a
label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the
format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be
provided to the telephone company.
Alarm dialing equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an
emergency situation. It must be able to do this even if other equipment (telephone,
answering system, computer modem, etc.) already has the telephone line in use. To do
so, alarm dialing equipment must be connected to a properly installed RJ31X jack that
is electrically in series with and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same
telephone line. If there are any questions concerning these instructions, consult the
telephone company or a qualified installer about installing the RJ31X jack and alarm
dialing equipment. Refer to "Digital Communicator" on page 36 for an illustration of
the proper installation of this equipment.
Important! The DACT must not be used to dial a phone number that is call-forwarded
per requirements of UL 864 9th Edition.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Telephone Requirements and Warnings

Product Description

1.10.3 Telephone Company Rights and Warnings
The telephone company, under certain circumstances, may temporarily discontinue
services and/or make changes in its facilities, services, equipment or procedures which
may affect the operation of this control panel. However, the telephone company is
required to give advance notice of such changes or interruptions.
If the control panel causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company
reserves the right to temporarily discontinue service. Advance notification will be
provided except in cases when advance notice is not practical. In such cases, notification will be provided as soon as possible. The opportunity will be given to correct any
problems and to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
DO NOT CONNECT THIS PRODUCT TO COIN TELEPHONE, GROUND START, OR
PARTY LINE SERVICES.
When the control panel activates, premise phones will be disconnected.
Two separate phone lines are required. Do not connect both telephone interfaces to the
same telephone line.
The control panel must be connected to the public switched telephone network
upstream (as first device) of any private telephone system at the protected premises.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone
network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted
by ACTA. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compliant RJ31X male modular plug and compatible modular
jack that is also compliant.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Product Description

Telephone Requirements and Warnings

1.10.4 For Canadian Applications
The following is excerpted from CP-01 Issue 5:
NOTICE: The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective,
operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document(s). The Department does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the users’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must
also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure, for their own protection, that the electrical ground connections of
the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspections authority, or electrician.
“The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an
indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone
interface. the termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the sum of the REN of all devices does not exceed
5.”
DOC Compliance - “This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of
the Canadian Department of Communications.”
Representative:

NOTIFIER/FIRE•LITE, CANADA
24 Viceroy Road
Concord, Ontario L4K2L9
Phone: (905) 660-7210
FAX: (905) 660-7204

IC Certificate Number:
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN): 1.3B
Load Number: 2

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Mounting Backbox

Installation

SECTION 2

The cabinet may be either semi-flush or surface mounted. The cabinet mounts using
two key slots and two 0.250” (6.35 mm) diameter holes located in the backbox. The
key slots are located at the top of the backbox and the two securing holes at the bottom.
Carefully unpack the system and check for shipping damage. Mount the cabinet in a
clean, dry, vibration-free area where extreme temperatures are not encountered. The
area should be readily accessible with sufficient room to easily install and maintain the
panel. Locate the top of the cabinet approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) above the floor with
the hinge mounting on the left. Determine the number of conductors required for the
devices to be installed. Sufficient knockouts are provided for wiring convenience.
Select the appropriate knockout(s) and pull the conductors into the box. All wiring
should be in accordance with the National and/or Local codes for fire alarm systems.

2.1 Mounting Backbox
The circuit board contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a
proper wrist strap before handling any boards so that static charges are removed from
the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies.

To prevent damage to the circuit board and to facilitate backbox mounting, the chassis
with main circuit board and transformer can be easily removed. Loosen the tow 3/8”
nuts securing the top flanges of the chassis, then slide the chassis up to free it from the
lower tabs. Place the chassis assembly in a safe location until it can be reinstalled in the
backbox.
Mark and predrill hole in the wall for the center top keyhole mounting bolt
using the dimensions illustrated in Figure 2.3 on page 29

See Page

Install center top fastener in the wall with the screw head protruding
Place backbox over the top screw, level and secure
Mark and drill the left and right upper and lower mounting holes
Note: outer holes (closest to sidewall) are used for 16” O.C. stud mounting
Install remaining fasteners and tighten
Main Circuit Board on chassis

mounting studs

92udchassisinbox.cdr

mounting slots

grounding stud

Backbox

Figure 2.1 MS-9200UDLS Chassis Removal

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Installation

Mounting Transformer

2.2 Mounting Transformer
One XRM-24(E) transformer is supplied standard with the control panel. An optional
second XRM-24(E) transformer can be ordered and installed to provide maximum
system power. Install the transformers in the locations indicated in the following
illustration.
1. When the location is dry and free of construction dust, install the chassis/
transformer/circuit board assembly.
2. Mount the chassis to the backbox by aligning the two mounting tabs with the
slots in the backbox, then position the two mounting hole tabs over the studs with
nuts located in the upper portion of the backbox.
3. Slide the tabs located on the bottom of the chassis into the mounting slots in the
backbox by pressing the chassis down.
4. Secure the chassis to the backbox by tightening the two mounting nuts (#10-32)
at the top, and to ensure proper grounding, use a 3/8” nut driver or socket.
5. If the main circuit board is not already attached to the chassis, install it by
positioning the ten mounting holes over the studs on the chassis and secure with
the supplied screws.
6. Connect the Standard XRM-24 Transformer plug to Transformer 1 Connector
J10 on the FACP main circuit board
7. Connect the Optional XRM-24 Transformer plug to Transformer 2 Connector J11
on the FACP main circuit board.
8. Complete the installation as detailed in the following sections.

Optional XRM-24 Transformer
Standard XRM-24 Transformer

Mounting Studs

Mounting Slot

Figure 2.2 MS-9200UDLS Main Board/Chassis Installation

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Mounting Transformer

Installation

9050udencl.cdr

Semi-Flush Mounting
Do not recess box more
than 3.875” into wall to
avoid covering venting
holes on top of box.

Figure 2.3 MS-9200UDLS Cabinet Mounting

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Mounting Transformer

9050udcab.cdr

Installation

Figure 2.4 MS-9200UDLS Cabinet Dimensions

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Power

Installation

2.3 Power
WARNING: Several different sources of power can be connected to this panel.
Disconnect all sources of power before servicing. The panel and associated equipment
may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules or interconnecting
cables while this unit is energized.

2.3.1 AC Power and Earth Ground Connection
Primary power required for the FACP is 120 VAC,
LCD DISPLAY
J4
J1
60 Hz, 3.0 amps for the MS-9200UDLS or 240
VAC, 50 Hz, 1.5 amps for the MS-9200UDLSE.
TB11
Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply
J9
with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and/or local codes. Use 14 AWG (2.00
- +
HOT NEUT EARTH
BATTERY
mm2) or larger wire with 600 volt insulation rating.
Make certain that the AC mains circuit breaker is off before wiring any connections
between the mains and the control panel. Connect wiring from the AC mains to TB11
on the FACP, being careful to observe proper connections.
Connect a wire from the grounding stud in the cabinet to a known solid earth ground in
the building. Refer to Figure 2.1 on page 27 for location of the stud. This connection is
vital for maintaining the control panel’s immunity to unwanted transients generated by
lightning and electrostatic discharge. Apply AC power to the panel only after the
system is completely installed and visually checked. Note that AC power must be
applied to the panel before installing the battery interconnect cable (refer to the
following section).

2.3.2 Battery Power

Interconnect
Cable

Before connecting the batteries to the FACP, make
+
certain that the interconnect cable between the
batteries is not connected. Do not connect the
interconnect cable until the system is completely
installed. Observe polarity when connecting the batteries. Connect the battery cable to
J9 on the main circuit board. Refer "Power Supply Calculations" on page 163, for
calculation of the correct battery rating.
-

See Page

WARNING: Battery contains sulfuric acid which can cause severe burns to the skin
and eyes and can destroy fabrics. If contact is made with sulfuric acid, immediately
flush the skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.

2.3.3 Special Application DC Power Output Connection
All Special Application DC power outputs are power-limited and require a ferrite bead
per FCC requirements (refer to "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements" on page 35).
Power-limited Resettable Power
0.5 amperes max., 24 VDC nominal filtered, resettable power can
be drawn from TB1 Terminals 3(+) and 4(-)

Power-limited Resettable or Nonresettable Power
0.5 amperes max., 24 VDC nominal filtered, resettable
or nonresettable power can be drawn from TB1
Terminals 1(+) and 2(-)

JP4
1
2
3

TB1 + - + 1

92udtb1.cdr

JP4 is used to configure TB1,
Terminals 1 & 2 for:
• Resettable Power - jumper pins 1 and
2 of JP4 as shown
• Nonresettable Power - jumper pins 2
& 3 of JP4

Figure 2.5 Special Application Power Outputs - 24 VDC

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Installation

Relays

2.4 Relays
The FACP provides two programmable Form-C relays and one fixed fail-safe Form-C
trouble relay, all with contacts rated for 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC (resistive) or 0.5 amps @
30 VAC (resistive).
Note that relay connections may be power-limited or nonpower-limited, provided that
0.25” spacing is maintained between conductors of power-limited and nonpowerlimited circuits. Refer to UL Power-limited wiring requirements.

TB5

TB6

RELAY 3

RELAY 1

RELAY 2

NO NC C

NO NC

TB7

92udreyp.cdr

Note that the programmable relay labeled as
Relay 1 is factory default programmed as
Alarm and programmable Relay 3 is factory
default programmed as Supervisory.
The relay labeled Relay 2 is fixed as a
Trouble relay and cannot be changed. It is a
fail-safe relay which will transfer on any
trouble or total power failure.

Relay contacts shown with power applied to panel and
no active troubles, alarms or supervisories

Figure 2.6 Relay Terminals

2.5 Notification Appliance Circuits

See Page

Reference
Manual

The control panel provides four Style Y (Class B) or two Style Z (Class A) NACs
(Notification Appliance Circuits). Each circuit is capable of 2.5 amps of current. Total
current in alarm for all external devices cannot exceed 6.0 amps (refer to "Calculating
the System Current Draw" on page 164). Use UL listed 24 VDC notification
appliances only. Circuits are supervised and power-limited. Refer to the Device
Compatibility Document for a listing of compatible notification appliances. The
NACs, which are located on the main circuit board, may be expanded via the FCPS
Series field charger/power supplies.
The following sections describe the configuration and wiring of Style Y and Style Z
Notification Appliance Circuits on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board. The NACs
are configured for Style Y (Class B) from the factory. Refer to "Configuring NACs"
on page 33 for information on changing the NAC configuration to Style Z (Class A).

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Notification Appliance Circuits

Installation

2.5.1 Configuring NACs
The Notification Appliance Circuits on the main circuit board are configured for Style
Y (Class B) or Style Z (Class A) by properly orienting the NACKEY card in JP6 which
is located at the top of the main circuit board near the NAC terminal blocks TB3 and
TB4. The default configuration is for Style Y (Class B). Refer to Figure 2.7 for
information on installing the NACKEY card.
• Style Z (Class A) - install NACKEY into JP6 with
Class A pointing down toward circuit board as
illustrated to the right.
• Style Y (Class B) - install NACKEY into JP6 with
Class B pointing down toward circuit board .

NACKEY Card
NACKEY -PCA
CLASS B

Key

CLASS A
NACKEY -PCA

Key-slot

92nackey.cdr

NACKEY must be inserted with text side facing in
toward center of main circuit board and key into keyslot as illustrated to the right. It is keyed to prevent
incorrect insertion.

JP6

Top edge of MS-9200UDLS
Main Circuit Board

TB3

TB4

NACKEY card slot

JP6

Figure 2.7 NAC Configuration Using NACKEY

2.5.2 Style Y (Class B) NAC Wiring
4 Style Y (Class B) Notification Appliance Circuits, supervised and power-limited - 4.7 kΩ, ½ watt P/N:71252 UL listed
NAC 4

NAC 3

NAC 2

Polarized Bells

Polarized Strobes

Polarized Horns

Notification Appliance Circuit
polarity shown in alarm state
circuit number

TB3

B B B B
+ + - 1 3 3 1

B B B B
+ + - 2 4 4 2

Polarized Bells

Polarized Strobes

Polarized Horns

Dummy Load all unused circuit

9200nacy.cdr

NAC 1

TB4

Figure 2.8 NAC Style Y (Class B) Wiring

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Installation

Remote Synchronization Output

2.5.3 Style Z (Class A) NAC Wiring
2 Style Z (Class A) Notification Appliance Circuits,
supervised and power-limited
Polarized Bell

Polarized Strobe

Polarized Horn

NAC 1

Polarized Bell

Polarized Strobe

Polarized Horn

B A A B
+ + - -

9200nacz.cdr

Notification Appliance Circuit
polarity shown in alarm state
TB4

TB3

NAC 2

Figure 2.9 NAC Style Z (Class A) Wiring

2.6 Remote Synchronization Output
Synchronization is a feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in
such a way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time. This is
particularly critical when activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid
random activation and a potential hazard to individuals. Devices connected directly to
the control panel’s NACs can be synchronized as described in "Type" on page 88.
Notification appliances connected to remote power sources may require
synchronization with the FACP’s devices. This can be accomplished by connecting the
Remote Synchronization Output from TB2 of the MS-9200UDLS to a compatible sync
input of a power supply such as the FCPS-24FS6/8. The 24 VDC, 40 mA signal from
TB2 follows, that is mimics, the signal on NAC1. This allows the devices connected to
the power supply to be synchronized with the devices connected to NAC1 on the FACP.
The Remote Synchronization Output is power-limited and supervised and requires a
ferrite bead (refer to "UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements" on page 35). A 4.7 kΩ
ELR resistor must be connected to the end of the wiring at the remote power supply.
Remote Power Supply

Sync Input
Remote Sync Output
TB1

4.7 kΩ ELR

TB3

TB2

TB4

JP4

FACP main circuit board

1
2
3

+ 24V - + 24V NON-RST RST
POWER POWER

+ -

REMOTE PWR
SUPPLY SYNC

B+ A+ A- B1B+ 3B+ 3B- 1B-

B+ A+ A- B2B+ 4B+ 4B- 2B-

Figure 2.10 Remote Sync Output

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements

Installation

2.7 UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements
Power-limited and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must remain separated in the
cabinet. All power-limited circuit wiring must remain at least 0.25” (6.35 mm) away
from any nonpower-limited circuit wiring and nonpower-limited circuit wiring must
enter and exit the cabinet through different knockouts and/or conduits. A typical wiring
diagram for the MS-9200UDLS is shown below.
Figure 2.11 Typical UL Power-limited Wiring Requirements
Power-limited Circuits

Power-limited Circuits

Nonpower-limited Circuits

*Ferrite Beads
*Ferrite Beads

Power-limited Circuits

maintain minimum 0.25”
between power-limited
and nonpower-limited
circuits wiring

AC Power
Ground Strap
Nonpower-limited
Circuits

Grounding Stud

92udulpw.cdr

To Batteries

*Ferrite Bead Installation
Per FCC requirements, ferrite beads are required for the DC Power Outputs, Remote Power Supply Sync, ACS Output and SLC Circuit.

Wrap wire around ferrite bead as shown.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Close ferrite bead.

Installation

Digital Communicator

2.8 Digital Communicator
Two independent telephone lines can be connected to the control panel. Telephone line
control/command is made possible via double line seizure as well as usage of an RJ31X
style interconnection. Note that it is critical that the panel's digital communicator be
located as the first device on the incoming telephone circuit to properly function.
Important! The DACT must not be used to dial a phone number that is call-forwarded
per requirements of UL 864 9th Edition.
Customer Premises Equipment and Wiring
Network
Service
Provider’s
Facilities

Computer

RJ31X
Jack

Unused
RJ-11 Jack
FACP with DACT

Telephone
Line
Telephone
Network
Demarcation
Point

Unused
RJ-11 Jack

Fax Machine

Answering
System

actadact.cdr

Telephone

Figure 2.12 DACT Installation
The control panel's digital communicator is built into the main circuit board.
Connection and wiring of two phone lines is required as shown below.
(Secondary Lines)
Incoming Telco
Phone Lines
Tip
Ring

KISSOFF

PRI. ACTIVE

J13

Green Wire
Red Wire

Tip
Ring
Ring
To premise phones
Tip

Green Wire
Red Wire

(Primary Lines)
Incoming Telco
Phone Lines
Ring
To premise phones
Tip

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Note:Shorting bars
inside RJ31X Jack
removed during
male plug insertion

SEC. ACTIVE

J12

7 foot
Cable
MCBL-7
(ordered
separately)
PRI. PHONE LINE SEC. PHONE LINE

Modular Female
Connectors

Male Plug
Connectors

Figure 2.13 Wiring Phone Jacks

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Optional Module Installation

Installation

2.9 Optional Module Installation
WARNING! Disconnect all sources of power (AC and DC) before installing or
removing any modules or wiring.
MS-9200UDLS Keypad/Display Removal
Removal of the keypad/display is normally not necessary. If, however, it becomes
necessary to replace the keypad/display or access jumpers JP5 and JP7 or switch SW1,
the Keypad/Display can be removed by inserting a Phillips screwdriver into each of the
three holes located in the flexible covering of the Keypad/Display and loosening the
three mounting screws. Note that it is not necessary to disconnect the cables between
the Keypad/Display and the main circuit board unless the unit itself is being replaced.
Carefully lift the Keypad/Display and rest the unit at the bottom of the main circuit
board.
Mounting Screw Access Hole
TB2

TB1

TB3

TB4

TB7 NO NC C

JP4
1
2
3

+ 24V - + 24V NON-RST RST
POWER POWER

+ -

REMOTE PWR
SUPPLY SYNC

JP6

B+ A+ A- B1B+ 3B+ 3B- 1BNAC 1 CLASS A
NAC 1 & 3 CLASS B

B+ A+ A- B2B+ 4B+ 4B- 2BNAC 2 CLASS A
NAC 2 & 4 CLASS B

TB5 NO NC CTB6NO NC C

RELAY 3

RELAY 1

TB8 OUT+ IN+ OUT- IN- TB9

ACS

SLC SLC SLC SHIELD
TB10SLC
B+ A+ B- A- A B

RELAY 2

JP2

JP1

REMOVE TO
DISABLE GND. FLT.

4XTMF
1 2 3

JP7

J6
JP3
CUT TO
MONITOR
4XTMF

SW1

JP5

J11

KISSOFF

CAUTION!

TRANSFORMER 2

HIGH VOLTAGE

PRI. ACTIVE
LCD DISPLAY

TRANSFORMER 1

SEC. ACTIVE

KEYPAD
I/F

TB11

J13

J12

J3
J9

J10

- +

BATTERY

MINI DIN
KEYBOARD CONN.

Mounting Screw Access Holes

PRI. PHONE LINE SEC. PHONE LINE

96dact1.cdr

HOT NEUT EARTH

Figure 2.14 Keypad/Display Removal

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Installation

Optional Module Installation

2.9.1 4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation
The 4XTMF provides a supervised output for a local energy municipal box transmitter
in addition to alarm and trouble reverse polarity. A jumper option allows the reverse
polarity circuit to open with a system trouble condition if no alarm condition exists. A
disable switch allows disabling of the transmitter output during testing to prevent
accidental calling of the monitoring service.
Local Energy Municipal Box Service (NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems):
Supervisory Current: 5.0 mA
Trip Current: 350 mA (subtracted from notification appliance power)
Coil Voltage: 3.65 VDC
Maximum Coil Resistance: 14.6 ohms
Maximum allowable wire resistance between panel and trip coil: 3 ohms
Municipal Box wiring can leave the building
Remote Station Service (NFPA 72 Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems) - Intended
for connection to a polarity reversal circuit or a Remote Station receiving unit
having compatible ratings:
Maximum load for each circuit: 10 mA
Reverse polarity output voltage: 24 VDC
Remote Alarm and Remote Trouble wiring can leave the building
Before installing the module, place the disconnect switch to the right (disconnect)
position to prevent accidental activation of the municipal box. Note that a Disconnect
LED will illuminate after the module is installed in the MS-9200UDLS. In addition,
the System Trouble LED will turn on to indicate the Disconnect condition.
Note: 4XTMF Module is not suitable for
transmitting reverse polarity supervisory signal.

}Remote Alarm (power-limited)*
}Remote Trouble (power-limited)*
}

+ - +
1 2 3

+ 6 7

* Wiring from these
terminals can exit the
protected premises.
Dummy load terminals
No connection
6 and 7 (4.7kΩ, ¼ watt
resistor) if Municipal
Municipal Box (nonpower-limited)*
Box is not connected.

Polarities are shown for module activation

4xtmfl.cdr

Disconnect LED

Disconnect Switch
shown in disconnect
position

TBL Jumper

Connect to FACP J10 & J11

Figure 2.15 4XTMF Transmitter Module

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Optional Module Installation

Installation
The following steps must be followed when installing the 4XTMF module:
1. Remove all power (Primary and Secondary) from the FACP before installing
4XTMF
2. Cut jumper JP3 on the main circuit board to allow the control panel to supervise
the 4XTMF module
3. Carefully plug the connectors on the 4XTMF module into connectors J5 and J6
on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board, being careful not to bend any pins
4. Secure 4XTMF module to standoffs with supplied screws.
5. Reapply power to the FACP
6. For proper 4XTMF operation, the output relays must be programmed for the
factory default settings: Alarm Relay 1, Trouble Relay 2 and Supervisory Relay 3
7. When the installation has been complete, enable the 4XTMF module by sliding
the disconnect switch to the left
8. Test system for proper operation
TB5 NO NC CTB6NO NC C

Standoff
RELAY 1

TB8

OUT+ IN+ OUT- IN-

TB9

ACS

SLC SLC SLC
TB10 SLC
B+ A+ B- A-

SHIELD

Standoff

RELAY 2

JP2

JP1

J5 & J6 Connectors
1 2 3

4XTMF

Cut Jumper JP3

JP3
CUT TO
MONITOR
4XTMF

KISSOFF

J13

FACP main circuit board

SEC. ACTIVE

J12

PRI. PHONE LINE SEC. PHONE LINE

92ud4xtm.cdr

PRI. ACTIVE

Figure 2.16 4XTMF Connectors to MS-9200UDLS Connectors
NOTE: Jumper JP2 on the FACP main circuit board can be used to configure the FACP
supervisory relay for operation with the 4XTMF module. Relay 3 at TB5 must be
programmed as a supervisory relay.
Cutting JP2 will allow the 4XTMF to generate a trouble if the supervisory contact opens
Leaving JP2 in will prevent generation of a trouble if the supervisory contact opens

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Installation

Optional Module Installation

2.9.2 Printer/PC
A serial printer or a PC (personal computer) may be connected to TB8 Terminals 1 - 4
on the FACP. The printer can be used to provide a hard-copy printout of real-time
events, history file and walktest data. An IBM compatible PC can be connected to
provide local FACP programming capabilities using the PK-CD programming utility.
Installation of either device requires panel programming to allow the FACP to
communicate with the device.

CAUTION! Do not connect a printer or PC to the MS-9200UDLS FACP if a ground
fault (zero impedance to ground) exists on the control panel. Circuit damage may
result. Remove all power (Primary and Secondary) before installing or removing any
wiring.
Installation
Remote printers and PCs require separate primary power. Also required is the PRT/
PK-CABLE which is an interface cable prewired to a DB9F connector. Wire the PRT/
PK-CABLE to TB8 Terminals 1 - 4 as illustrated in the following figure. Connect the
DB9F connector to the printer or PC serial EIA-232 port. If a nine-pin serial connector
is not available on the printer or PC, use a DB25 adapter. Make certain that the DB25
adapter does not swap the Transmit and Receive lines. Apply power to the FACP and
printer or PC. Note that a ground fault (zero impedance to ground) may occur on the
FACP, dependent on the printer or PC being used, due to this connection. For this
reason, it is important that there be no preexisting ground fault on the panel.
Note that the printer may or may not be supervised as determined by user
programming. Refer to "Printer/PC" on page 115.

Red
5 4 3 2 1

White

9 8 7 6

Green

PRT/PK-CABLE

Black

TX
RCV
DTR
GRND
ACS

SLC SLC SLC SHIELD
TB10 SLC
B+ A+ B- A- A B

Figure 2.17 Serial Printer and Computer Connections

9600tb7a.cdr

TB8 OUT+ IN+ OUT- IN- TB9

Printer Configuration
Refer to the documentation supplied with the printer for pertinent information about
printer setup. Set the printer’s options as listed in the following table:
COMMUNICATION SETUP
BUFFER:
DATA BITS:
PARITY:
STOP BIT:
BAUD RATE:
AUTOMATIC LINE FEED
AUTOMATIC CARRIAGE RETURN

LARGE
7
EVEN
1 STOP
2400/4800/9600
NO
NO

PC Configuration
The Windows-based PK-CD Programming Utility Kit contains CD-ROM with on-line
help file.
40

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Optional Module Installation

Installation

2.9.3 Digital Communicator and Annunciators
2.9.3.1 ACM-8RF Relay Control Module

Reference
Manual

The ACM-8RF module provides eight Form-C relays with contacts rated for 5
amps. When installed with an MS-9200UDLS FACP, the ACM-8RF modules
provide relay activation for each of the 99 possible FACP zones plus special
functions. Options exist to allow for alarm only or alarm and trouble activation per
zone. Output activation for general alarm, general trouble, general supervisory,
NAC fault, AC fail, walktest start and battery trouble are also available. The ACM8RF can be mounted remotely in an ABS-8RF annunciator surface-mount backbox.
Refer to the ACM-8RF manual for information on setting module switches for
addressing and relay functions.

2.9.3.2 ACS and AFM Series Annunciators
ACS and AFM Series Annunciators provide visual indications of FACP status in
remote locations. Refer to the appropriate annunciator manual for information on
installation, wiring and operation.
Annunciator addressing is specific to the MS-9200UDLS control panel. The
following table describes the annunciator addresses and the corresponding
addressable devices that will be annunciated at each annunciator address.
ACM Annunciator Address
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

Annunciator Displays the Following Points
8 General System Status Points & Zones 1 - 56
Zones 57 - 99 & 4 NACs
SLC Loop, Module Addresses 1 - 64
not used
SLC Loop, Module Addresses 65 - 99
not used
not used
SLC Loop, Detector Addresses 1 - 64
not used
SLC Loop, Detector Addresses 65 - 99
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
8 General System Status Points & Zones 1 - 56
Zones 57 - 99 & 4 NACs
SLC Loop, Module Addresses 1 - 64
not used
SLC Loop, Module Addresses 65 - 99
not used
not used
SLC Loop, Detector Addresses 1 - 64
not used
SLC Loop, Detector Addresses 65 - 99
not used
not used
not used

The MS-9200UDLS must be programmed for the annunciators installed on the
system. Refer to "Annunciators/UDACT" on page 96 for information on
annunciator programming. Make certain to program the annunciator addresses that
have been physically installed on the system.
Note: The 8 General System Status Points include the following:
• General Alarm
• General Trouble
• General Supervisory

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

• Alarm Silenced
• System Off Normal
• AC Loss

• Battery Fault
• NAC Fault

Programming

Programming Data Entry

Programming

SECTION 3

NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION
AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES
This product incorporates field-programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the requirements in the
Standard for Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must
be limited to specific values or not used at all as indicated below:
Program feature
Permitted in
Settings permitted
Possible settings
or option
UL 864? (Y/N)
in UL 864
Refer to "Trouble Call Limit (Dialer Runaway Prevention)" on page 102.
Trouble Call Limit
Trouble Call Limit

Trouble Call Limit = 0 (factory default): unlimited
calling to Central Station for any trouble condition
Trouble Call Limit = 1 - 99: limits call for each unique
trouble to from 1 to 99 within a 24 hour period

= 0 for unlimited
Central Station
trouble calls

3.1 Programming Data Entry
Programming can be accomplished using the MS-9200UDLS keypad or by connecting
an optional standard computer keyboard. The keyboard can be connected to the PS-2
connector J3 on the control panel main circuit board.
The information presented in this section refers to programming the MS-9200UDLS
via the onboard keypad. If an optional computer keyboard is connected to the MS9200UDLS main circuit board, the following table describes the keyboard keys which
correspond to the onboard keypad keys.
Keypad Keys

Home

CLR

Delete

ESC

Esc

RECALL

Insert

A-Z

0-9

0-9
(on QZ key)

—

Computer Keyboard Keys

1st Event

Space bar
—

•

ENTER

Enter

ACK/STEP

SILENCE

DRILL

RESET

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

User Programming

Programming

3.2 User Programming
!!

The MS-9200UDLS is completely field programmable and requires no special software
skills. While programming the MS-9200UDLS, the fire protection capabilities of the
control panel are enabled.
Site-specific programming may be accomplished in three ways:
•

Autoprogramming Feature - This is a convenient method for quickly bringing
the FACP addressable SLC devices on-line without the necessity of
programming each device individually. Refer to "Autoprogram" on page 47 for
a detailed description of Autoprogramming

•

Manual programming or editing, using the FACP keypad or a PC keyboard

•

Off-line Programming and Editing Feature - allows creation and editing of sitespecific custom programs using a Windows-based computer. For programs
requiring a large amount of data entry, this method may be preferred. A PK-CD
programming kit can be ordered for this purpose

The System All Normal screen will be displayed in a programmed system with no active
alarms, troubles or supervisories, as illustrated below:

HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY
SYSTEM ALL NORMAL
10:00A 012102
Programming, Read Status and Manual Dial mode can be entered while the panel is in
any mode of operation. If the panel is in alarm, the alarm condition must be
acknowledged before entering any other mode. To access any of the programming or
read status features, the Enter or Mode key must be pressed, which will cause the LCD
to display the following:

1=READ STATUS MODE
2=PROGRAMMING MODE
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE

See Page

Pressing 1, while this screen is being displayed, will cause the control panel to enter the
Read Status Mode which allows the user to view the programmed features and status of
the control panel The Read Status feature is not password protected. Refer to "Read
Status" on page 140 for a detailed description of this feature.
Pressing 2 will select user Programming Mode which may only be accomplished by an
authorized person. After pressing 2, a screen will prompt for a password. After
entering the correct password, the user may select from a list of programming options.
Pressing 3 will select the Manual Dial Mode which allows the user to enter a
troubleshoot mode of operation.
Exit Programming, Read Status and Manual Dial Mode
The programmer can exit any mode by repeatedly pressing the keypad ESC (Escape)
key until the display reads System All Normal. Note that the data which is entered
during Programming mode is not saved until the programmer exits this mode by
repeatedly pressing the ‘ESC’ key. If the Reset key is pressed or power is lost before
exiting Programming mode, all data just entered will be lost.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Initial Power-up
User Programming Levels
There are two user programming levels:
•
•

User Master Program Level 1 is used for programming panel specific data
relating to device types, zoning, messages, control panel functions, etc.
User Maintenance Program Level 2 is used by a qualified operator to access
features such as Disable/Enable, View and Clear History, Walktest and System
Time Change.

3.3 Initial Power-up
The following sections describe the initial programming procedures for a new system.
The same procedures are used to modify programming in an existing system.
After completing the wiring of addressable devices to the SLC, apply power to the
control panel. If the addressable devices have not yet been programmed into the FACP,
their LEDs will not flash and the following trouble message will be displayed.

TROUBL IN SYSTEM
NO DEVICES INSTALLED
09:03A 012102

3.4 Programming Screens Description

See Page

Three options are available when the Enter key is pressed: Read Status, Programming
and Manual Dial Mode. The Read Status and Programming options have multiple
functions or features which may be chosen. To view all of the choices, it is necessary
that the programmer scroll through a number of additional subscreens. These
selections are displayed on multiple screens to make them more readable for the
programmer. Refer to "Master Programming Level" on page 46, for additional
information on the various screens.
The title of the main option screen will always be displayed at the top of the subscreens
for the programmer’s convenience. If additional subscreens exist, an Up or Down
arrow will be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen being viewed. The
programmer can then press the keypad Up or Down arrow key to view the new
subscreen. To select one of the choices in a screen, the programmer presses the keypad
numerical key corresponding to the desired choice.
Note that subscreens may also have multiple options which require viewing more than
one screen. The same process, as detailed in the previous paragraphs, is followed to
view all option choices.

3.5 Programming and Passwords

See Page

There are two factory set programming passwords which will access the Programming
screens as indicated in the following examples. From either of the screens, access to
specific system and device features or programming may be obtained. All user
programming entries are stored in nonvolatile memory. The factory set passwords can
be changed by the user as described in "Password Change" on page 116. If an invalid
password is entered, the blinking cursor will return to the first password character
position. To exit Programming, Read Status or Manual Dial mode at any time, press
the ESC (Escape) key repeatedly. Note that Programming mode must be exited using
the ESC key in order to store the program data entered during this mode. If the Reset
key is pressed or power is lost before exiting Programming mode, the data just entered
will not be saved.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming and Passwords

Programming

To access user Programming mode, press the Enter or Mode key. The LCD will display
the following:

1=READ STATUS MODE
2=PROGRAMMING MODE
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE

To enter the user Programming mode, press 2. The display will read as follows:

PROGRAMMING
ENTER PASSWORD
*****

Entering the Master level password (default 00000) will cause the following screen to
appear:

PROGRAMMING
1=AUTOPROGRAM
2=POINT PROGRAM
3=ZONE SETUP

If the Maintenance level password (default 11111) is entered, the following screen will
appear:

PROGRAMMING
1=POINT PROGRAM
2=HISTORY
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Note that in the two preceding screens, an arrow appears to inform the programmer that
additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

3.6 Master Programming Level
When the Master Program Level password is entered, the control panel will enter user
Programming mode. In this mode, the piezo sounder remains off, the trouble relay is
activated and the system Trouble LED flashes until Programming mode is exited. The
following display will appear:

PROGRAMMING
1=AUTOPROGRAM
2=POINT PROGRAM
3=ZONE SETUP
Programming Screen #1
The down arrow which appears in the display indicates that additional programming
choices can be viewed by pressing the down arrow key on the keypad. If a down and
up arrow appear in the display, pressing the ‘down’ arrow key will display the
subsequent Programming Screens as illustrated below while pressing the ‘up’ arrow
key will display the previous screen.

PROGRAMMING
1=LOOP SETUP
2=SYSTEM SETUP
3=VERIFY LOOP
Programming Screen #2

PROGRAMMING
1=HISTORY
2=WALKTEST
3=OPTION MODULES
Programming Screen #3

PROGRAMMING
1=PASSWORD CHANGE
2=CLEAR PROGRAM
3=PROGRAM CHECK
Programming Screen #4

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming

3.6.1 Autoprogram
PROGRAMMING
1=AUTOPROGRAM
2=POINT PROGRAM
3=ZONE SETUP

Programming Screen #1

Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen #1, will select the Autoprogram option,
which prompts the control panel to poll all devices installed on the SLC loop. The
primary purpose of autoprogramming is to allow the installer a fast and easy way to
bring the system on-line as quickly as possible. The first time the system is poweredup, it should be autoprogrammed.
If the system is already programmed and Autoprogram is initiated, the system will only
add default values for newly installed devices.
When Autoprogram is selected, the control panel will begin autoprogramming the
system by communicating with each addressable device installed on the SLC loop.
While autoprogramming, the panel will display the following:

AUTOPROGRAM
AUTOPROGRAMMING!
PLEASE WAIT
Autoprogram Progress Screen
When Autoprogramming is completed, the control panel will display the type and
quantity of each device installed on the SLC loop similar to the following display:

# OF DET LOOP1 055
# OF MON LOOP1 035
# OF CON LOOP1 030

Autoprogram Result Screen #1

In the preceding example, the display indicates that the SLC Loop has 55 addressable
detectors, 35 monitor modules and 30 control modules installed.
Pressing the ESC key will return the display to Programming Screen #1.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

3.6.2 Point Program
PROGRAMMING
1=AUTOPROGRAM
2=POINT PROGRAM
3=ZONE SETUP

Programming Screen #1

The Point Program option allows the programmer to add a new addressable device to an
SLC loop, delete an existing device from a loop or change the programming for an
existing device. Pressing 2, while viewing Programming Screen #1, will select the
Point Program option and display the following screen:

POINT PROGRAM
SELECT TYPE
1=DETECTOR
2=MODULE
Point Program Screen

3.6.2.1 Detector Programming
Pressing 1, while viewing the Point Program Screen, will allow the programmer to
add, delete or change the programming of an addressable detector. The following
screen will be displayed by the control panel:

DETECTOR
1=ADD
2=DELETE
3=EDIT
Detector Screen
3.6.2.1.1 Add Detector
Pressing 1 while viewing the Detector Screen will display the following screen
which allows the programmer to add a new detector address to programming:

ADD DETECTOR
ENTER DETECTOR#
***
Add Detector Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The
programmer keys in the three digit detector address, such as 005.
When the last digit is keyed-in, the following screen will be displayed:

DETECTOR TYPE
1=SMOKE(PHOTO)
2=USER-DEFINED-1
3=SMOKE(ION)
Press the down arrow key to view additional choices. Press the number
corresponding to the desired selection to program that type to the newly added
detector.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
When the type has been selected, the following screen will be displayed:

ADD DETECTOR
DETECTOR#
005
IS ADDED

The programmer can continue adding detectors by pressing the ESC key which will
return the display to the Add Detector Screen.
DETECTOR
1=ADD
2=DELETE
3=EDIT

3.6.2.1.2 Delete Detector
Pressing 2 in the Detector Screen will display the Delete Detector Screen which
allows the programmer to delete a specific detector:

DELETE DETECTOR
ENTER DETECTOR#
***

Detector Screen

Delete Detector Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The
programmer keys in the three digit detector address, such as 005. When the last
digit is keyed-in, the following screen will be displayed:

DELETE DETECTOR
DETECTOR#
005
IS DELETED

The programmer can continue deleting detectors by pressing the ESC key which
will return the display to the Delete Detector Screen.
3.6.2.1.3 Edit Detector
The programmer can change a detectors existing or factory default programming by
pressing 3 in the Detector Screen. The following screen will be displayed:

EDIT DETECTOR
ENTER POINT ADDRESS
***
Edit Detector Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The
programmer keys in the three digit detector address, such as 017.
When the last digit is keyed-in, if the selected address has not been added to
programming, a screen showing information about a device with the highest address
that is installed will be displayed.
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
If no detectors have been installed on the loop, the following will be displayed:

NO DETECTOR
INSTALLED

Edit Detector Screen #1
If the selected address has been added to programming, device summary screens
will be displayed. These screens allow the programmer to view all device settings
at a single glance. Pressing the left or right arrow keys will allow the programmer
to rapidly view the devices at the previous or next address (if installed).
If a detector (such as a photoelectric detector) with the selected address is not
physically installed on the SLC or has a communication fault but the address is
programmed in the system, the following screen will be displayed:

TROUBL SMOKE(PHOTO)

ZNNN
*
1D017
Edit Detector Screen #1
If the selected address has been added to programming and a detector (such as a
photoelectric detector) with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC
and is communicating with the control panel, the following will be displayed:

NORMAL SMOKE (PHOTO)

ZNNN
V
1D017
Edit Detector Screen #1
To change the programming for the displayed detector, press the keyboard ‘down’
arrow key to view the Edit Detector screens.
In the preceding example:
Normal - indicates that the detector with the selected address is physically
installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel (enabled)
- represents the adjective and noun, which have been
programmed, describing the location of the displayed device
ZNNN - represents the first of five possible software zones that the detector is
assigned to (NNN = the three digit zone number from 000 - 099)
V or * - indicates whether or not alarm verification is enabled (V = alarm
verification enabled and * = alarm verification disabled)
1D017 - represents the Loop, Device type and Device address (1 = SLC Loop,
D=Detector and 017 = Detector Address 017)

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
The following examples show the editing of a photoelectric smoke detector with
address 017, located on the SLC loop:

EDIT DETECTOR 1D017
1=ENABLED
YES
2=TYPE SMOKE(PHOTO)
3=VERIFICATION
OFF
Edit Detector Screen #2

EDIT DETECTOR 1D017
1=WALKTEST
NO
2=PAS
NO
3=PRE-SIGNAL
NO
Edit Detector Screen #3

EDIT DETECTOR 1D017
1=ZONE ASSIGNMENT
00 ** ** ** **
Edit Detector Screen #4

EDIT DETECTOR 1D017
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION
********************
Edit Detector Screen #5

Enable/Disable Detector
EDIT DETECTOR
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=VERIFICATION

Edit Detector Screen #2

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

To Enable or Disable the detector, press the 1 key while viewing the Edit Detector
Screen #2. Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled Yes and
Enabled No. If Enabled No is selected, the detector will not be polled by the control
panel, preventing the detector from reporting alarms and troubles to the panel. The
control panel will display the device type and address which has been disabled and
will turn on the Trouble LED and Disable LED.

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
Type

EDIT DETECTOR
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=VERIFICATION

To select the type of detector being programmed, press the 2 key while viewing the
Edit Detector Screen #2. This will cause the control panel to display the following
Detector Type Screens:

Edit Detector Screen #2

DETECTOR TYPE
1=SMOKE(PHOTO)
2=USER-DEFINED-1
3=SMOKE (ION)
Detector Type Screen #1

Pressing the down arrow key will display additional detector types as indicated in
the following table.
Detector Type
Smoke Photo
User-Defined-1
Smoke Ion
User-Defined-2
Heat Detect
User-Defined-3
Smoke DuctP
User-Defined-4
Superv-DuctP
User-Defined-5
Future
Future

Action When Activated
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Smoke Photo)
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Smoke Ion)
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Heat Detect)
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Smoke DuctP)
Supervisory, latching
same as previous (Superv DuctP)
not used
not used

While viewing either Detector Type screen, select the type of detector being
programmed by pressing the corresponding keyboard number key. The display will
return to Edit Detector Screen #2 and indicate the selection next to the Type option.
Note: If a detector is selected to be a SUPERV DUCTP type, it will function like a
supervisory point not a fire alarm point. The supervisory LED and supervisory
relay will activate, not the fire alarm LED or alarm relay, if the detector senses
smoke.
Verification

See Page

Alarm verification is used to confirm that a smoke detector activation is a true alarm
condition and not a false alarm. This feature is selected by pressing 3 while viewing
the Edit Detector Screen #2 so that the display reads Verification On. Each time the
3 key is pressed, the display will toggle between Verification On and Verification
Off. For a detailed description, refer to "Alarm Verification (None or One Minute)"
on page 139.
Walktest

EDIT DETECTOR
1=WALKTEST
2=PAS
3=PRE-SIGNAL

Edit Detector Screen #3

The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the
necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation. To
enable a device for the Walktest feature, press 1 while viewing the Edit Detector
Screen #3 until the display reads Walktest Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause
the display to toggle between Walktest Yes and Walktest No. Refer to "Walktest" on
page 139.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
PAS

See Page

The PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) option will program the detector to delay panel
activation (including alarm relay and communicator) for a period of 15 seconds plus
a programmable time of up to 3 minutes. Zone 97, however, will activate
immediately and may be used to connect a signaling device to indicate PAS
activation (do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose). To enable
the PAS feature, press 2 while viewing the Edit Detector Screen #3 until the display
reads PAS Yes. Each press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between PAS
Yes and PAS No. Refer to "Positive Alarm Sequence" on page 137.
For example, if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for PAS operation:
Select PAS Yes when editing the detector set to address 005
Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector, in this
example Z001
Program an output, such as a control module that is to be activated by detector
005 by assigning the same zone to it; in this example Z001
Program an output, such as a control module, for PAS activation by assigning
zone Z97 to it. This control module may be connected to a signaling device
used to indicate a PAS condition (do not use a Notification Appliance Circuit
for this purpose)
Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone PAS 97 and set the PAS delay
timer to some value
With the preceding program settings, when the detector with address 005 is
activated, zone Z97 will cause its associated control module to activate
immediately, sounding the connected PAS signaling device. Following the PAS
delay time, zone Z001 will cause its associated control module to activate and the
control panel will initiate an alarm condition.
Pre-signal

EDIT DETECTOR
1=WALKTEST
2=PAS
3=PRE-SIGNAL

Edit Detector Screen #3

See Page

The Pre-signal option programs the detector to delay panel activation for a
preprogrammed time delay of up to three minutes while allowing for visual
verification by a person. Note that the alarm relay and communicator will respond
to the initial alarm immediately. In addition, Zone 98 will activate. This zone can
be programmed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or
indicator which the installer designates as a Presignal indication (do not use a
Notification Appliance Circuit for this purpose). To enable the Pre-signal feature,
press 3 while viewing Edit Detector Screen #3 until the display reads Pre-signal
Yes. Each press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Pre-signal Yes
and Pre-signal No. Refer to "Presignal" on page 136.
For example, if a detector with address 005 is to be configured for Pre-Signal
operation:
Select Pre-signal Yes when editing the detector set to address 005
Program the desired zone or zones to be activated by this detector, in this
example Z001
Program an output, such as a control module that is to be activated by detector
005 by assigning the same zone to it; in this example Z001
Program an output, such as a control module, for Pre-signal activation by
assigning zone Z98 to it. This control module may be connected to a signaling
device used to indicate a Pre-signal condition (do not use a Notification
Appliance Circuit for this purpose)
Enable zones Z001 and Special Purpose Zone Pre-signal 98 and set the Presignal delay timer to some value

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
With the preceding program settings, when the detector with address 005 is
activated, zone Z98 will cause its associated control module to activate
immediately, sounding the connected signaling device to indicate the Pre-signal
condition. Following the Pre-signal delay time, zone Z001 will cause its associated
control module to activate and the control panel will initiate an alarm condition.
Zone Assignment

EDIT DETECTOR
1=ZONE ASSIGNMENT
00 ** ** ** **

Edit Detector Screen #4

A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable detector.
Pressing 1 while viewing Edit Detector Screen #4 displays the following screen:

ZONE ASSIGNMENT
Z00 Z** Z** Z** Z**

Zone Assignment Screen

See Page

Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to this device. The
factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone. A
flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number
corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device. The cursor moves to
the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining
zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone Z00. When all
desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments.
The display will return to the Edit Detector Screen #4. Note that the left and right
arrow keys can be used to navigate through the zones and the CLEAR key can be
used to quickly clear a zone.
Noun/Adjective

EDIT DETECTOR
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION
*****************

Edit Detector Screen #5

The Noun/Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors
about the detector currently being programmed. Pressing 1 while viewing Edit
Detector Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN
Noun/Adjective Screen

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

Programming
Pressing 1 while viewing the Noun/Adjective Screen will cause the following
screen(s) to be displayed. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed
to see all the Adjective screens. Press the number corresponding to the adjective
that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the detector currently being
programmed. When an adjective has been selected, it will appear at the top of the
display as indicated by the asterisks.

**********************
1=NORTH
2=SOUTH
3=EAST

**********************
1=3RD
2=4TH
3=5TH

Adjective Screen #1

Adjective Screen #5

**********************
1=WEST
2=FRONT
3=CENTER

**********************
1=FLOOR1
2=FLOOR2
3=FLOOR3

Adjective Screen #2

Adjective Screen #6

**********************
1=REAR
2=UPPER
3=LOWER
Adjective Screen #3

**********************
1=FLOOR4
2=FLOOR5
3=ROOM
Adjective Screen #7

*********************
1=MAIN
2=FIRST
3=2ND
Adjective Screen #4

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun/Adjective Screen will cause the following
screen(s) to be displayed. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed
to see all the Noun screens. Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to
be used as a descriptor for the location of the detector currently being programmed.
When a noun has been selected, it will appear at the top of the display as indicated
by the asterisks.

**********************
1=BASEMENT
2=BOILER RM
3=CLASSROOM
Noun Screen #1

**********************
1=CLOSET
2=CORRIDOR
3=ELECTRIC RM
Noun Screen #2

**********************
1=ELEVATOR
2=ENTRANCE
3=FLOOR
Noun Screen #3

**********************
1=GARAGE
2=HALLWAY
3=HVAC RM
Noun Screen #4

**********************
1=KITCHEN
2=LOBBY
3=OFFICE
Noun Screen #5

**********************
1=PATIENT
2=RESTROOM
3=ROOM
Noun Screen #6

**********************
1=STAIRWAY
2=STOREROOM
3=WING
Noun Screen #7

**********************
1=ZONE

Noun Screen #8

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun/Adjective Screen will display screens
similar to the previous Adjective and Noun Screens. The new screens will list
custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel
using the PK-CD programming kit. These descriptors are selected as described in
the previous sections.

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

Description
EDIT DETECTOR
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION

The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information
about the detector currently being programmed. This information will be displayed
as part of the device label on the display. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Detector
Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

Edit Detector Screen #5

DESCRIPTION
1D002
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
********************
Adjective/Noun Screen

A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left. The programmer can
enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed. This
information will appear on the display along with the standard device label
information.
A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered. To enter
alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until
the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the
letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 2, A and
B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat
the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four
times until a blank appears in the desired position. When all characters have been
entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the
Edit Detector Screen #5, displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen.
Recall/Increment Function
In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the
cursor is on the first letter of the Description, Adjective or Noun field as follows:

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

•

If the zero key is pressed, a 0 is placed in the first letter position

•

If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the
entire field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device programmed,
and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall function). The
Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter-by-letter

•

If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last
character in the field is a number 0-9, the number is incremented by one. If the
last character is a letter, it changes to a 0. If the last character goes from 9 to 0
and the characters to the left of the last character are also numbers, they are also
incremented (overflow)

•

The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
As an example, the user could quickly enter ‘FLR_3_ROOM_305’ as follows:
1. The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field. Press the zero key twice to
display FLR_3
2. With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field, press the zero key twice to
recall the display ROOM_304. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to
the last letter of the Noun field
3. With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field, press the zero key again to
increment the room number to 305
4. Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field
5. Select a zone number from 00 to 99. Z00 (default zone) is the general alarm
zone. Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones

3.6.2.2 Module Programming
POINT PROGRAM
SELECT TYPE
1=DETECTOR
2=MODULE

Pressing 2, while viewing Point Program Screen #2, will allow the programmer to
add, delete or change the programming of an addressable module. The following
screen will be displayed by the control panel:

Point Program Screen #2

MODULES
1=ADD
2=DELETE
3=EDIT
Modules Screen
3.6.2.2.1 Add Module
Pressing 1 while viewing the Modules Screen will display the following screen
which allows the programmer to add a new module address to programming:

ADD MODULE
ENTER MODULE#
***
Add Module Screen #1
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The
programmer keys in the three digit module address, such as 005.
When the last digit is keyed-in, the following screen will be displayed:

ADD MODULE
1=CONTROL
2=MONITOR

Add Module Screen #2

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Pressing 1 for Control Module or 2 for Monitor Module will cause the following
screen to be displayed:

ADD MODULE
MODULE#
005
IS ADDED

Add Module Screen #3
The programmer can continue adding modules by pressing the ESC or left arrow
key which will return the display to the Add Module Screen #1.

MODULES
1=ADD
2=DELETE
3=EDIT

3.6.2.2.2 Delete Module
Pressing 2 in the Modules Screen will display the Delete Module Screen which
allows the programmer to delete a specific module:

DELETE MODULE
ENTER MODULE#
***

Modules Screen

Delete Module Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. Using
the panel keypad, key in the module address such as 005. When the last digit is
keyed in, the following confirmation that the module has been deleted will be
displayed:

DELETE MODULE
MODULE#
005
IS DELETED

3.6.2.2.3 Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module
The programmer can change a modules existing or factory default programming by
pressing 3 in the Modules Screen. The following screen will be displayed:

EDIT MODULE
ENTER MODULE ADDRESS
***
Edit Module Screen

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left. The
programmer keys in the three digit module address, such as 012. When the last digit
is keyed-in, if the selected address has not been added to programming, a screen
showing information about the highest address that is installed will be displayed. If
no modules are installed on the loop, the following screen will be displayed:

NO MODULE
INSTALLED
Edit Module Screen
If the selected address has been added to programming but a module (such as a
monitor module) with the selected address is not physically installed on the SLC or
has a communication fault, the following screen will be displayed:

TROUBL MONITOR

ZNNN
*
1M012

If the selected address has been added to programming and a module (such as a
monitor module) with the selected address is physically installed on the SLC and is
communicating with the control panel, the following screen will be displayed:

NORMAL MONITOR

ZNNN
W
1M012

To change the programming for the displayed module, press the keyboard down
arrow key to view the following Edit Monitor screens. In the preceding example:
Normal - indicates that the module with the selected address is physically
installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel (enabled)
- represents the adjective and noun, which have been
programmed, describing the location of the displayed device
ZNNN - represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is
assigned to (NNN = the two digit zone number from 000 - 099)
1M012 - represents the Loop, Device type and Device address (1 = SLC Loop
1, M=Module and 012 = Module Address 012)
W or * - indicates whether or not the device is programmed for Walktest (W =
programmed for walktest, * = not programmed for walktest).

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

See Page

Programming
If the selected address corresponds to a control module, a screen displaying
information about the control module with the selected address will be displayed as
shown in "Edit Module Screen for Control Modules" on page 68.
If the selected address corresponds to a monitor module, a screen displaying
information about the module with the selected address will be displayed as
illustrated in the following:

NORMAL MONITOR

ZNNN
1M012

EDIT MONITOR 1M012
1=ENABLED
YES
2=TYPE MONITOR
Edit Monitor Screen #2

EDIT MONITOR
1=PRE-SIGNAL

1M012
NO

Edit Monitor Screen #3

EDIT MONITOR 1M012
1=WALKTEST
YES
2=ZONE ASSIGNMENT
00 ** ** ** **
Edit Monitor Screen #4

EDIT MONITOR 1M012
1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN
2=DESCRIPTION
********************
Edit Monitor Screen #5

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
Enable/Disable Module
To Enable or Disable the monitor module, press the 1 key while viewing the Edit
Module Screen #2. Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled
Yes and Enabled No. If Enabled No is selected, the module will not be polled by the
control panel, preventing the module from reporting alarms and troubles to the
panel. The control panel will indicate a system trouble condition and the Disable
LED with turn on if any devices are disabled.

EDIT MONITOR
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE MONITOR

Edit Monitor Screen #2

Type Monitor
Using the PK-CD Upload/Download utility program, unique user-defined monitor
types can be created and loaded into the FACP for later use. The FACP response to
the activation of a user-defined type is the same as most previous standard types in
the list, thus allowing a variety of user-defined types and responses. To select the
type of monitor module being programmed, press the 2 key while viewing the Edit
Monitor Screen #2. This will cause the control panel to display the following
Monitor Type Screens:

MONITOR TYPE
1=PULL-STATION
2=USER-DEFINED-1
3=WATERFLOW
Monitor Type Screen #1

Pressing the down arrow key will display additional Monitor Type screens. While
viewing one of the Monitor Type screens, select the type of monitor module being
programmed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key. The display will
return to the Edit Monitor Screen #2 which will show the new type selection.
Table 3.1 on page 63 lists the Monitor Types and their respective functions.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Monitor module type selection will affect the function of the point as follows:
Table 3.1 Monitor Types

Monitor Type
Pull-Station
User-Defined-1
Waterflow
User-Defined-2
Monitor
User-Defined-3
Future
Future
Smoke-Conventional
User-Defined-5
Heat-Conventional
User-Defined-6
Medic-Alert
User-Defined-7
Hazard-Alert
User-Defined-8
Tornado-Alert
User-Defined-9
Future
Future
Tamper
User-Defined 11
Supervisory
User-Defined 12
Supervisory-AR
User-Defined 13
Power-Monitor
User-Defined 14
Trouble-Monitor
User-Defined-15
Process-Monitor
User-Defined 16
Process-Monitor-AR
User-Defined-17
Future
Future
Ack-Switch
Sil-Switch
Reset-Switch
Drill-Switch
PAS-Bypass
HVAC RESTART
HVAC OVRRIDE
Drill-Switch-AR

Action When Activated
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Pull-Station)
Fire Alarm Delayed
same as previous (Waterflow)
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Monitor)
not used
not used
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Smoke-Conventional)
Fire Alarm
same as previous (Heat-Detector)
Supervisory, latching
same as previous (Medic-Alert)
Supervisory, latching
same as previous (Hazard-Alert)
Supervisory, latching
same as previous (Tornado-Alert)
not used
not used
Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking)
same as previous (Tamper)
Supervisory, latching
same as previous (Supervisory)
Supervisory, nonlatching (tracking)
same as previous (Supervisory-AR)
Power Fault
same as previous (Power Monitor)
Trouble
same as previous (Trouble Monitor)
Piezo
same as previous (Process-Monitor)
Piezo, nonlatching (tracking)
same as previous (Process-Monitor-AR)
not used
not used
Acts like panel Acknowledge Key
Acts like panel Silence Key
Acts like panel Reset Key
Acts like panel Drill Key
PAS Disable
Switch
Switch
Acts like panel Drill Key, nonlatching (tracking)

Note:
1. For the PROCESS-MONITOR-AR selection, AR refers to AutoResettable
2. For HVAC RESTART and HVAC OVRRIDE descriptions, refer to "Monitor
Module Operation" on page 179

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
Pre-signal

EDIT MONITOR
1=PRE-SIGNAL

Edit Monitor Screen #3
See Page

EDIT MONITOR
1=WALKTEST
2=ZONE ASSIGNMENT
00 ** ** ** **

Edit Monitor Screen #4

To enable the Pre-signal feature, press 1 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen #3 until
the display reads Pre-signal Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to
toggle between Pre-signal Yes and Pre-signal No. Refer to "Presignal" on page 136
for additional information.
Walktest
The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the
necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation. To
enable devices, which are connected to a monitor module, for the Walktest feature,
press 1 while viewing the Edit Monitor Screen #4 until the display reads Walktest
Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes
and Walktest No. Refer to "Walktest" on page 139 for additional information.
Zone Assignment
A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable monitor module.
Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Monitor Screen #4 displays the following screen:

MON ZONE ASSIGN
Z00 Z** Z** Z** Z**

Zone Assignment Screen
Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to this device. The
factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone. A
flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number
corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device. The cursor moves to
the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining
zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones Z00. When all
desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments.
The display will return to the Edit Monitor Screen #4.
EDIT MONITOR
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION
*****************

Edit Monitor Screen #5

Noun/Adjective
The Noun/Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors
about the monitor module currently being programmed. Pressing 1 while viewing
Edit Monitor Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN
Noun/Adjective Screen

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

**********************
1=NORTH
2=SOUTH
3=EAST

**********************
1=3RD
2=4TH
3=5TH

Adjective Screen #1

Adjective Screen #5

**********************
1=WEST
2=FRONT
3=CENTER

**********************
1=FLOOR 1
2=FLOOR 2
3=FLOOR 3

Adjective Screen #2

Adjective Screen #6

**********************
1=REAR
2=UPPER
3=LOWER
Adjective Screen #3

**********************
1=FLOOR 4
2=FLOOR 5
3=ROOM
Adjective Screen #7

**********************
1=MAIN
2=FIRST
3=2ND
Adjective Screen #4

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

**********************
1=BASEMENT
2=BOILER RM
3=CLASSROOM
Noun Screen #1

**********************
1=CLOSET
2=CORRIDOR
3=ELECTRIC RM
Noun Screen #2

**********************
1=ELEVATOR
2=ENTRANCE
3=FLOOR
Noun Screen #3

**********************
1=GARAGE
2=HALLWAY
3=HVAC RM
Noun Screen #4

**********************
1=KITCHEN
2=LOBBY
3=OFFICE
Noun Screen #5

**********************
1=PATIENT
2=RESTROOM
3=ROOM
Noun Screen #6

**********************
1=STAIRWAY
2=STOREROOM
3=WING
Noun Screen #7

**********************
1=ZONE

Noun Screen #8

Pressing 3 or 4 while viewing the Noun/Adjective Screen will display screens
similar to the previous Adjective and Noun Screens. The new screens will list
Custom Adjectives and Nouns which have been programmed into the control panel
using the PK-CD programming kit.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Description

EDIT MONITOR
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION
*****************

The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information
about the monitor module currently being programmed. This information will be
displayed as part of the device label on the LCD display. Pressing 2 while viewing
Edit Monitor Screen #5 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

Edit Monitor Screen #5

DESCRIPTION
1M012
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
********************
Noun/Adjective Screen

A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left. The programmer can
enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed. This
information will appear on the LCD display along with the standard device label
information.
A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered. To enter
alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until
the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the
letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 2, A and
B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat
the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four
times until a blank appears in the desired position. When all characters have been
entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the
Edit Monitor Screen #4, displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen.
Recall/Increment Function
In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the
cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows:

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

•

If the zero key is pressed, a 0 is placed in the first letter position

•

If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the
entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device
programmed, and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall
function). The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter-byletter

•

The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
As an example, the user could quickly enter ‘FLR_3_ROOM 305’ as follows:
1. The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field. Press the zero key twice to
display FLR_3
2. With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field, press the zero key twice to
recall the display ROOM_304. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to
the last letter of the Noun field
3. With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field, press the zero key again to
increment the room number to 305
4. Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field
5. Select a zone number from 00 to 99. Z00 (default zone) is the general alarm
zone. Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones

MODULES
1=ADD
2=DELETE
3=EDIT

Modules Screen

3.6.2.2.4 Edit Module Screen for Control Modules
The programmer can change a module’s existing or factory default programming by
pressing 3 in the Modules Screen. The following screen will be displayed:

EDIT MODULE
ENTER MODULE ADDRESS
***
Edit Module Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the position of the first asterisk to the left.
The programmer keys in the three digit module address, such as 002. When the last
digit is keyed-in, if the selected address corresponds to a control module, a screen
displaying information about the control module with the selected address will be
displayed as illustrated in the following:

NORMAL

CONTROL

ZNNN
SW 1M002

Edit Control Screen #1
In the preceding example:
Normal - indicates that the module with the selected address is physically
installed on the SLC and communicating with the control panel (enabled)
- represents the adjective and noun, which have been
programmed, describing the location of the displayed device
Control - indicates that the selected module is a control module
S or * - represents Silenceable (S) or Nonsilenceable (*)
W or * - represents Waterflow Timer Delay (W = Waterflow Timer Delay
enabled, * = Waterflow Timer Delay disabled)
ZNNN - represents the first of five possible software zones that the module is
assigned to (NNN = the three digit zone number from 000 - 099)
1M002 - represents the Loop, Device type and Device address (1 = SLC Loop,
M=Module and 002 = Module Address 02)

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
To change the programming for the displayed module, press the keyboard down
arrow key to view the following Edit Control screens:

EDIT CONTROL
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE CONTROL
3=SILENCEABLE

YES
YES

Edit Control Screen #2

EDIT CONTROL
1=WALKTEST
YES
2=ZONE ASSIGNMENT
00 ** ** ** **
Edit Control Screen #3

EDIT CONTROL
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION
********************
Edit Control Screen #4
EDIT CONTROL
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=SILENCEABLE

Edit Control Screen #2

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

Enable/Disable Module
To Enable or Disable the control module, press the 1 key while viewing the Edit
Control Screen #2. Each press of the key will toggle the screen between Enabled
Yes and Enabled No. If Enabled No is selected, the module will not be polled by the
control panel, preventing the module from activating its output devices. The control
panel will indicate a system trouble condition and the Disable LED will turn on if
any devices are disabled.

11/04/05

Programming
EDIT CONTROL
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=SILENCEABLE

Edit Control Screen #2

Master Programming Level
Type
To select the type of control module being programmed, press the 2 key while
viewing the Edit Control Screen #2. This will cause the control panel to display the
following Control Type Screens. Press the down arrow key to view additional
screens and selections.

CONTROL TYPE
1=BLANK
2=BELL-CIRCUIT
3=HORN-CIRCUIT
Control Type Screen #1

While viewing one of the Control Type screens, select the type of control module
being programmed by pressing the corresponding keypad number key. The display
will return to the Edit Control Screen #2 and indicate the new type selection.
Note: A control module set to the Resettable Power type will follow the main circuit
board 24 VDC resettable power unless the control module is disabled.
The following table contains control module type codes and their functions which
are displayed in the Control Type screens:
Control Type

Special Function

Blank

None

Bell Circuit

None

Horn Circuit

None

Sounders

None

Relay

Ignore Open Circuit

Strobe Circuit

None

Control

None

Resettable Power

Relay Type - Ignore Open Circuit

HVAC SHUTDN

Relay Type - Ignore Open Circuit

Note: For HVAC SHUTDN description, refer to "Control Module Operation" on
page 179

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

EDIT CONTROL
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=SILENCEABLE

Edit Control Screen #2

EDIT CONTROL
1=WALKTEST
2=ZONE ASSIGNMENT
00 ** ** ** **

Edit Control Screen #3

Programming
Silenceable
The Silenceable selection allows the programmer to select whether output devices
connected to the control module can be silenced, either by pressing the Alarm
Silence key or by enabling Autosilence. Pressing the 3 key while viewing Edit
Control Screen #2 will enable the Silenceable feature causing the display to read
Silenceable Yes. Repeated presses of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle
between Silenceable Yes and Silenceable No.
Walktest
The Walktest feature allows one person to test the system devices without the
necessity of manually resetting the control panel after each device activation. To
enable devices, which are connected to a control module, for the Walktest feature,
press 1 while viewing the Edit Control Screen #3 until the display reads Walktest
Yes. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Walktest Yes
and Walktest No. Refer to "Walktest" on page 139 for additional information.
Zone Assignment
A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each addressable control module.
Pressing 2 while viewing Edit Control Screen #3 displays the following screen:

ZONE ASSIGNMENT
Z00 Z** Z** Z** Z**

Zone Assignment Screen

Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to this device. The
factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone. A
flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number
corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this device. The cursor moves to
the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining
zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zones Z00. When all
desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments.
The display will return to the Edit Control Screen #3.
EDIT CONTROL
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
2=DESCRIPTION

Edit Control Screen #4

Noun/Adjective
The Noun/Adjective selection allows the programmer to enter specific descriptors
about the control module currently being programmed. Pressing 1 while viewing
Edit Control Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN
Noun/Adjective Screen

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

Pressing 1 while viewing the Noun/Adjective Screen will cause the following
screen(s) to be displayed. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed
to see all the Adjective screens. Press the number corresponding to the adjective
that is to be used as a descriptor for the location of the control module currently
being programmed.

**********************
1=NORTH
2=SOUTH
3=EAST

**********************
1=3RD
2=4TH
3=5TH

Adjective Screen #1

Adjective Screen #5

**********************
1=WEST
2=FRONT
3=CENTER

**********************
1=FLOOR 1
2=FLOOR 2
3=FLOOR 3

Adjective Screen #2

Adjective Screen #6

**********************
1=REAR
2=UPPER
3=LOWER
Adjective Screen #3

**********************
1=FLOOR 4
2=FLOOR 5
3=ROOM
Adjective Screen #7

**********************
1=MAIN
2=FIRST
3=2ND
Adjective Screen #4

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

1=STANDARD ADJECTIVE
2=STANDARD NOUN
3=CUSTOM ADJECTIVE
4=CUSTOM NOUN

Noun/Adjective Screen

Programming
Pressing 2 while viewing the Noun/Adjective Screen will cause the following
screen(s) to be displayed. Note that the keyboard down arrow key must be pressed
to see all the Noun screens. Press the number corresponding to the noun that is to
be used as a descriptor for the location of the control module currently being
programmed.

**********************
1=BASEMENT
2=BOILER RM
3=CLASSROOM
Noun Screen #1

**********************
1=CLOSET
2=CORRIDOR
3=ELECTRIC RM
Noun Screen #2

**********************
1=ELEVATOR
2=ENTRANCE
3=FLOOR
Noun Screen #3

**********************
1=GARAGE
2=HALLWAY
3=HVAC RM
Noun Screen #4

**********************
1=KITCHEN
2=LOBBY
3=OFFICE
Noun Screen #5

**********************
1=PATIENT
2=RESTROOM
3=ROOM
Noun Screen #6

**********************
1=STAIRWAY
2=STOREROOM
3=WING
Noun Screen #7

**********************
1=ZONE

Noun Screen #8

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
Description

EDIT CONTROL
1=ADJECTIVE/NOUN
2=DESCRIPTION

The Description selection allows the programmer to enter additional information
about the control module currently being programmed. This information will be
displayed as part of the device label on the display. Pressing 2 while viewing Edit
Control Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

Edit Control Screen #4

DESCRIPTION
1M002
1=NOUN/ADJECTIVE
********************
Adjective/Noun Screen
A flashing cursor will appear at the first asterisk to the left. The programmer can
enter additional descriptive information about the device being programmed. This
information will appear on the display along with the standard device label
information.
A maximum of 20 characters (including spaces) can be entered. To enter
alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate key until
the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to enter the
letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters 1, A and
B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right and repeat
the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ) key four
times until a blank appears in the desired position. When all characters have been
entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to the
Edit Control Screen #4, displaying the new information at the bottom of the screen.
Recall/Increment Function
In addition, the user may use the Recall/Increment function at any time when the
cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective or Noun field as follows:
•
•

•

If the zero key is pressed, a 0 is placed in the first letter position
If the zero key is then pressed a second time with no intervening key actions, the
entire Adjective field is replaced with the field entered for the previous device
programmed, and the cursor moves to the last character of the field (Recall
function). The Recalled Adjective or Noun field may now be changed letter-byletter
If the zero key is pressed again with no other intervening key actions and the last
character in the field is a number 0-9, the number is incremented by one. If the
last character is a letter, it changes to a 0. If the last character goes from 9 to 0
and the characters to the left of the last character are also numbers, they are also
incremented (overflow)
The above increment function may be repeated with each press of the zero key
As an example, the user could quickly enter ‘FLR_3_ROOM 305’ as follows:

1. The cursor is on the first letter of the Adjective field. Press the zero key twice to
display FLR_3
2. With the cursor on the first letter of the Noun field, press the zero key twice to
recall the display ROOM_304. The cursor automatically jumps from the first to
the last letter of the Noun field
3. With the cursor on the last letter of the Noun field, press the zero key again to
increment the room number to 305
4. Press the right arrow key to advance the zone field
5. Select a zone number from 00 to 99. Z00 (default zone) is the general alarm
zone. Z01 through Z99 may be selected to link software zones

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

PROGRAMMING
1=AUTOPROGRAM
2=POINT PROGRAM
3=ZONE SETUP

Programming

3.6.3 Zone Setup
Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #2 will access the Zone Setup screens as
illustrated below:

Programming Screen #2

ZONE SETUP
1=ENABLE
2=DISABLE
3=ZONE 97 98 99
Zone Setup Screen #1

ZONE SETUP
1=ZONES INSTALLED
2=ZONES ENABLED
3=ZONES DISABLED
Zone Setup Screen #2

ZONE SETUP
1=ZONE TYPES
2=ZONES AVAILABLE
Zone Setup Screen #3
ZONE SETUP
1=ENABLE
2=DISABLE
3=ZONE 97 98 99

3.6.3.1 Enable
Pressing 1 for Enable, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #1, will display the
following screen:

Zone Setup Screen #1

ZONE TO ENABLE
Z

Enable Screen

This screens allows the programmer to enable zones, one at a time. A flashing
cursor appears next to the Z, prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone
number (01 - 99). When the second digit is entered, the zone will be enabled and
the cursor returns to the original position next to the Z. Another zone can then be
enabled.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming
ZONE SETUP
1=ENABLE
2=DISABLE
3=ZONE 97 98 99

Zone Setup Screen #1

Master Programming Level

3.6.3.2 Disable
Pressing 2 for Disable, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #1, displays the following:

ZONE TO DISABLE
Z

Disable Screen
This screen allows the programmer to disable zones, one at a time. A flashing
cursor appears next to the Z, prompting the programmer to enter a two digit zone
number (01 - 99). When the second digit is entered, the zone will be disabled and
the cursor will return to the original position next to the Z. Another zone can then
be disabled.

3.6.3.3 Zone 97, 98 and 99
Pressing 3 for Zone 97, 98 and 99, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #1, will
display the following screen:

SPEC PURPOSE ZONE
1=PAS 97
OFF
2=PRESIGNAL 98
OFF
3=TWO STAGE 99
OFF
Zone 97, 98 and 99 Screen
Zones 97, 98 and 99 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special
purpose applications. In the above illustration, the three zones are shown Off,
which means they can be programmed to function in the same manner as all other
zones, by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone
Assignment Screen.
Pressing 1 will cause the display to change to PAS 97 On. Each press of the 1 key
will cause the display to toggle between PAS 97 On and PAS 97 Off. When Zone 97
is programmed On, a PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) activation of any smoke
detector will cause Zone 97 to activate. By assigning Zone 97 to a control module
in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device connected to the
control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel. Do not
assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate
a PAS condition. Attempting to do so will generate an error message and will be
prevented by software checks.
Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre-signal 98 On. Each press of the 2
key will cause the display to toggle between Pre-signal 98 On and Pre-signal 98
Off. When Zone 98 is programmed On, a Pre-signal activation of any device will
cause Zone 98 to activate. By assigning Zone 98 to a control module in the
Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device connected to the control
module can be used to indicate a Pre-signal condition in the control panel. Do not
assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate
a Pre-signal condition. Attempting to do so will generate an error message and will
be prevented by software checks.
Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 99 On. Each press of the 3
key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 99 On and Two Stage 99 Off.
Refer to "Two Stage Operation" on page 90 for a description of this feature.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

ZONE SETUP
1=ZONES INSTALLED
2=ZONES ENABLED
3=ZONES DISABLED

Programming

3.6.3.4 Zones Installed
Pressing 1 for Zones Installed, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #2, will display a
screen similar to the following:

Zone Setup Screen #2

ZONES INSTALLED
00 01 02 03 04 05

Zones Installed Screen
This display will show all of the zones that have been programmed into the control
panel. Note that an up and/or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of
the display, indicating that additional screens of zone information exists. Press the
up or down arrow keys to view the additional zones.

3.6.3.5 Zones Enabled
Pressing 2 for Zones Enabled, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #2, will display a
screen similar to the following:

ZONES ENABLED
00 01 02 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Zones Enabled Screen
This display will show all of the zones that are enabled in the control panel. Note
that an up and/or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display,
indicating that additional screens of zone information exists. Press the up or down
arrow keys to view the additional zones.

3.6.3.6 Zones Disabled
Pressing 3 for Zones Disabled, while viewing Zone Setup Screen #2, will display a
screen similar to the following:

ZONES DISABLED
03

Zones Disabled Screen
This display will show all of the zones that are disabled in the control panel. Note
that an up and/or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display,
indicating that additional screens of zone information exists. Press the up or down
arrow keys to view the additional zones.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming
ZONE SETUP
1=ZONE TYPES
2=ZONES AVAILABLE
3=ZONE MESSAGE

Zone Setup Screen #3

Master Programming Level

3.6.3.7 Zone Type
Zone Types must be programmed only if a DACT, programmed for zone reporting,
is installed on the control panel. Pressing 1 for Zone Types, while viewing Zone
Setup Screen #3, will display a screen similar to the following:

ZONE
1=Z00
2=Z01
3=Z02

TYPE PROG
MONITOR
MONITOR
MONITOR

Zones Installed Screen
This display will show the system zones (default and user programmed) and their
associated types. Note that an up and/or down arrow will appear in the upper right
corner of the display, indicating that additional screens of zone information exists.
Press the up or down arrow keys to view zones Z00 through Z99.
Zone types can be changed by pressing the keypad number key corresponding to the
zone in each Zones Installed Screen. Available zone types will be displayed in the
resultant screens. For example, to change the zone type for zone Z02 in the screen
illustrated above, press 3. The following screens will be displayed:

ZONE TYPE PROG
1=MONITOR
2=SMOKE PHOTO
3=WATERFLOW
Zone Type Program Screen #1

ZONE TYPE PROG
1=HEAT
2=PULL STATION
3=DUCT
Zone Type Program Screen #2

ZONE TYPE PROG
1=MEDICAL
2=HAZARD
3=TAMPER
Zone Type Program Screen #3

ZONE TYPE PROG
1=SUPERVISORY
2=PROC. MON
3=SMOKE ION
Zone Type Program Screen #4

To change the zone type for Z02 to Pull Station, scroll the display until Zone Type
Program Screen #2 is displayed. Press 2 to program zone Z02 as a Pull Station
zone. The display will return to the Zones Installed Screen showing zone Z02 and
the Pull Station program type. Repeat the procedure for each zone to be changed.
IMPORTANT! In Zone Type Program Screen #1, selecting WATERFLOW will
assign a Waterflow silenceable zone type to the selected zone. Any signaling
devices programmed to the same zone can be silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence
key or by using the auto-silence feature.
To program a waterflow circuit as nonsilenceable, refer to "System Setup" on page
80.
Note: Zone Types are only relevant for Central Station reporting. Changing a zone
type will only change how it is reported to the Central Station.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

ZONE SETUP
1=ZONE TYPES
2=ZONES AVAILABLE
3=ZONE MESSAGE

Programming

3.6.3.8 Zones Available
Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup Screen #3 will display a screen similar to the
following:

Zone Setup Screen #3

ZONES AVAILABLE
01 02 03 04 05 06 07
08 09 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
The display will show all of the zones that are still available for programming. Note
that an up and/or down arrow may appear in the upper right corner of the display,
indicating that additional screens of zone information exists. Press the up or down
arrow key to view additional screens.

PROGRAMMING
1=LOOP SETUP
2=SYSTEM SETUP
3=VERIFY LOOP

Programming Screen #2

3.6.4 Loop Setup
Loop Setup allows the programmer to configure the SLC Loop for NFPA Style 4, 6 or 7
wiring and to select the loop protocol. Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen
#2 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

LOOP SETUP
1=STYLE
4
2=PROTOCOL LITESPEED
Loop Setup Screen

3.6.4.1 Style
To program the SLC Style for the selected loop, press 1 for Style, while viewing
Loop Setup Screen. In the preceding example, the control panel is programmed for
Style 4 SLC wiring as indicated by the 4 to the right of Style in the display. To
change the wiring style, press 1 to toggle the display to read Style 6. Each press of
the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between Style 4 and Style 6. Note that,
when programming the Loop Style, the programmer can only select between Style 4
and Style 6. To program a system for Style 7 wiring, the programmer must select the
Loop Setup for Style 6. Style 7 wiring is the same as Style 6 with the added
requirement that each addressable device on the loop must have a pair of isolator
modules, one on each side.
Note on SLC Troubles: If the FACP reports an open fault on an SLC Loop
programmed for Style 6, the trouble condition will latch at the FACP. When the
SLC Loop has been repaired, the Reset button must be pressed at the FACP (at least
2 minutes after the trouble has been repaired) to clear the SLC trouble.

3.6.4.2 Loop Protocol
Loop Protocol refers to the SLC loop mode of operation. The two Loop Protocols
available are CLIP (Classic Loop Interface Protocol) which is used for the older
legacy addressable devices such as the M300 Series modules and detectors and
LiteSpeed (factory default setting) which is used for the 350 Series or newer
addressable devices for quicker response times. Note that the legacy devices can
operate only in CLIP mode while the newer devices are compatible with CLIP and
LiteSpeed modes of operation. Pressing 2 while viewing the Loop Setup Screen
will toggle between CLIP and LiteSpeed Protocols.
Device Addressing
It is important to note that the MS-9200UDLS addressable device capacity is 99

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
detectors and 99 control/monitor modules. Newer devices can be set to addresses
higher than 99 but these addresses will not function with the MS-9200UDLS.
Note that It is permissible to mix old and new devices on the same loop but the
FACP must be set for CLIP mode when older devices are installed.

3.6.5 System Setup
System Setup allows the programmer to configure the following control panel features:
•

•
•
•
•

•
•
•
PROGRAMMING
1=LOOP SETUP
2=SYSTEM SETUP
3=VERIFY LOOP

Trouble Reminder: This feature, when enabled, provides an audible reminder that
an alarm or trouble still exists on the FACP after the control panel has been
silenced. The control panel piezo sounder will pulse once every 15 seconds
during an alarm and every two minutes during a trouble condition, after the
Alarm Silence or Acknowledge key is pressed. The piezo will continue to sound
at these rates until the alarm or trouble condition is cleared. If the trouble
condition is not cleared within 24 hours, the panel will reactivate the trouble
sounder and retransmit the trouble condition to the central station if connected.
Banner: This option allows the user to change the top two lines of the LCD
display from the factory default readout of HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY to a
user defined readout when the control panel is in Normal condition.
Time-Date: This feature allows the programmer to set the time, display format
(24 hr or 12 hr), date and daylight savings time feature into the FACP memory
Timers: This option allows the programmer to set the PAS (Positive Alarm
Sequence) time delay, Pre-Signal time delay and Waterflow time delay.
NACs: This feature allows the programmer to configure the control panel
Notification Appliance Circuits for a variety of options, such as circuit type,
silenceable/nonsilenceable, autosilence, coding, silence inhibit, zone assignment
and enable/disable.
Relays: This option allows programming of two onboard relays for activation by
various control panel events, such as alarm, trouble, supervisory, etc.
Canadian Option: This option allows the automatic programming of ionization
smoke detector sensitivity thresholds to Canadian specifications.
Waterflow Silenceable: This option provides the ability to silence any output
circuit activated by a monitor module programmed as a waterflow type.

Pressing 2 for System Setup, while viewing Programming Screen #2, will cause the
following screens to be displayed:

Programming Screen #2

SYSTEM SETUP
1=TROUBLE REM
OFF
2=BANNER
3=TIME-DATE
System Setup Screen #1

SYSTEM SETUP
1=TIMERS
2=NAC
3=RELAYS
System Setup Screen #2

SYSTEM SETUP
1=CANADIAN OPT.
2=WATERFLOW SIL.

OFF
NO

System Setup Screen #3
80

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming

3.6.5.1 Trouble Reminder

See Page

The Trouble Reminder features causes the control panel piezo to sound a reminder
‘beep’ for alarms and troubles, after the panel has been silenced. Refer to "System
Setup" on page 80, for a detailed description of this feature. Pressing 1 while
viewing System Setup Screen #1 will cause the display to toggle to Trouble Rem
On, which enables this feature. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to
toggle between Trouble Rem On and Trouble Rem Off.

3.6.5.2 Banner
The top line of the display, which appears when the control panel is in normal mode,
can be changed by using the Banner option. Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup
Screen #1 will cause the following to be displayed:

BANNER
1=FACTORY
2=USER DEFINED
Banner Screen
BANNER
1=FACTORY
2=USER DEFINED

Pressing 1 while viewing the Banner Screen will select the factory default banner
setting and display the following screen:

Banner Screen

FACTORY BANNER
HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY

Factory Banner Screen
Pressing the Enter key will store this selection in nonvolatile memory and return the
display to the Banner Screen.
Pressing 2 while viewing the Banner Screen will cause the following screens to be
displayed:

USER DEFINED BANNER
PRESS ENTER IF OK
User Defined Banner Screen #1

USER BANNER - LINE 2
PRESS ENTER IF OK
************
User Defined Banner Screen #2
These screens allow the programmer to enter a two line custom banner. A flashing
cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of each display. A maximum of 20
characters (including spaces) can be entered into each screen for a total of two lines
with 40 characters. After entering up to 20 characters in the first screen, press Enter

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
to view the second screen. Enter up to 20 characters in the second screen in the
same manner or just press Enter if a second banner line is not being entered. To
quickly clear the current banner, press the CLR key.
To enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad, repeatedly press the appropriate
key until the desired character is displayed in the first position. For example, to
enter the letter B, press the 2 (ABC) key three times to toggle through the characters
1, A and B. Press the right arrow key to move the cursor one position to the right
and repeat the process to enter the next character. To enter a space, press the * (QZ)
key four times to place a blank in the desired position. When all characters have
been entered, press the Enter key to store the information. The display will return to
the Banner Screen.

SYSTEM SETUP
1=TROUBLE REM
2=BANNER
3=TIME-DATE

3.6.5.3 Time-Date
The control panel time and date can be changed by pressing 3 while viewing the
System Setup Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed:

System Setup Screen #1

TIME
1=TIME
2=DATE
3=CLOCK

AND DATE
10:00 AM
04-07-2002
FORMAT 12HR

Time-Date Screen #1

TIME AND DATE
1=DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

Time-Date Screen #2
3.6.5.3.1 Time
To change the time, press 1 while viewing the Time-Date Screen. The following
screen will be displayed:

ENTER TIME
10:00 AM
1=AM

2=PM

Time Screen
A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display. Below the cursor is
the current time. To change the time, enter the two-digit hours followed by the twodigit minutes. The cursor will move one position to the right each time a digit is
entered. After the last minutes digit is entered, the cursor will again move one
position to the right. At this point enter 1 for AM or 2 for PM. The display will
then return to the Time-Date Screen which will show the new time entry. If an error
is made while entering a digit, press the CLR key to delete the entire entry and
beginning again.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
3.6.5.3.2 Date
To change the date, press 2 while viewing the Time-Date Screen. The following
screen will be displayed:

ENTER DATE
MONTH DAY YEAR
04-07-2002
Date Screen
A flashing cursor is located toward the top left of the display. Below the cursor is
the current date. To change the date, enter the two-digit month followed by the twodigit day and then the two-digit year (01 for 2001, 02 for 2002, etc.). The cursor
will move one position to the right each time a digit is entered. After the last year
digit is entered, the display will return to the Time-Date Screen which will show the
new date entry. If an error is made while entering a digit, press the CLR key to
delete the entire entry and beginning again.
3.6.5.3.3 Clock Format
The clock can be configured to display 12 hour (AM & PM) or 24 hour (military)
time. Pressing 3 while viewing the Time-Date screen will cause the display to
toggle between 12HR and 24HR. Select 12HR for 12 hour display or 24HR for 24
hour display.
Note: If the clock is changed to 24 hour (military) format, the date will change to
the European standard of Day-Month-Year (for display purposes only).
TIME AND DATE
1=DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

3.6.5.3.4 Daylight Savings Time
Pressing 1 while viewing Time-Date Screen #2 will cause the following screens to
be displayed:

Time & Date Screen #2

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
1=ENABLED
YES
2=START MONTH
APR
3=START WEEK WEEK-1
Daylight Savings Screen #1

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
1=END MONTH
OCT
2=END WEEK
LAST-W
Daylight Savings Screen #2
Pressing 1 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #1 will cause the display to
toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No. The control panel will automatically
update the time for daylight savings time when Enabled Yes is selected.
Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #1 will display another screen
which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will
begin. In this sub-screen, pressing 1 will select March, 2 will select April and 3 will
select May.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
Pressing 3 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #1 will display two sub-screens
which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings
time will begin. In the first sub-screen, pressing 1 will select the first week, 2 will
select the second week and 3 will select the third week, while in the second subscreen, pressing 1 will select the fourth week and 2 will select the last week of the
selected month.
Pressing 1 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #2 will display another screen
which allows the programmer to select the month that daylight savings time will
end. In this sub-screen, pressing 1 will select September, 2 will select October and
3 will select November.
Pressing 2 while viewing Daylight Savings Screen #2 will display two sub-screens
which allow the programmer to select the week of the month that daylight savings
time will end. In the first sub-screen, pressing 1 will select the first week, 2 will
select the second week and 3 will select the third week, while in the second subscreen, pressing 4 will select the fourth week and 5 will select the last week of the
selected month.

SYSTEM SETUP
1=TIMERS
2=NAC
3=RELAYS

System Setup Screen #2

3.6.5.4 Timers
Timer delays for PAS, Pre-signal and waterflow activation can be programmed by
pressing 1 while viewing System Setup Screen #2. The following screen will be
displayed:

TIMERS
1=PAS DELAY
2=PRE SIGNAL
3=WATERFLOW

000
000
000

Timer Screen #1

TIMERS
1=AC LOSS DELAY

000

Timer Screen #2
TIMERS
1=PAS DELAY
2=PRE SIGNAL
3=WATERFLOW

Timer Screen #1

000
000
000

3.6.5.4.1 PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) Delay
The factory default setting for PAS is 000 for no delay. To select a PAS delay of 001
to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for PAS, press 1 while viewing Timer
Screen #1. The following display will appear:

PAS DELAY
RANGE 0-180 SECONDS
PAS Delay Screen
A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a delay
time consisting of three digits, such as 005 for five seconds. Upon entering the third
digit, the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display will
return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
3.6.5.4.2 Pre-signal Delay
The factory default setting for Pre-signal delay is 000 for no delay. To select a Presignal delay of 001 to 180 seconds for all devices programmed for Pre-signal, press
2 while viewing Timer Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed:

PRESIGNAL DELAY
RANGE 0-180 SECONDS
Pre-signal Delay Screen

A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a delay
time consisting of three digits, such as 009 for nine seconds. Upon entering the
third digit, the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the display
will return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time.
Note that the FACP can be programmed for either PAS or Pre-signal operation, not
both. For this reason, if the PAS Delay timer is set with a value greater than 000
and then the Pre-Signal Delay timer is set with a value greater than 000, the PAS
Delay timer will be automatically reset to 000. Only one of the two timers can have
a delay time set for it.
TIMER
1=PAS DELAY
2=PRE SIGNAL
3=WATERFLOW

000
000
000

Timer Screen #1

3.6.5.4.3 Waterflow Delay
A delay can be added prior to declaring a waterflow type of alarm. Be careful to
include any built-in delays of the waterflow device. The factory default setting for
Waterflow delay is 000 for no delay. To select a Waterflow delay of 01 to 90
seconds for all devices programmed for Waterflow delay, press 3 while viewing
Timer Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed:

WATERFLOW DELAY
RANGE 0-90 SECONDS
Waterflow Delay Screen

A flashing cursor is positioned in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a delay
time consisting of two digits, such as 25 for twenty-five seconds. Upon entering the
second digit, the time delay will be stored in the control panel memory and the
display will return to the Delay Screen which will indicate the new delay time.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming
TIMER
1=AC LOSS DELAY

Timer Screen #2

Master Programming Level
3.6.5.4.4 AC Loss Delay
The reporting of a loss of AC power to a central station can be delayed by
programming the length of the desired delay. Press 1 while viewing Timer Screen
#2 to display the following:

AC LOSS DELAY
1=NO DELAY
2=ENTER DELAY
AC Loss Delay Screen #1
Pressing 1 while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen #1 will program the FACP to
transmit an AC Loss report immediately to the central station.
Pressing 2 while viewing AC Loss Delay Screen #1 will display the following:

AC LOSS DELAY
RANGE 00-23
AC Loss Delay Screen #2
A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Type the two
digit AC loss reporting delay in hours (00 to 23 hour delay). When the second digit
is entered, the display will return to AC Loss Delay Screen #1.
Important: For Central Station applications, AC Loss Reporting Delay must be set
to a delay value ranging from 06 to 12 hours. For Remote Station applications, AC
Loss Reporting Delay must be set to a delay value ranging from 15 to 23 hours.
Note: AC Loss Delay also applies to any programmable output relay programmed
for ‘AC Loss.’
SYSTEM SETUP
1=TIMERS
2=NAC
3=RELAYS

System Setup Screen #2

3.6.5.5 NAC (Notification Appliance Circuit)
The options for the NACs on the control panel main circuit board can be configure
by pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen #2. The following screens will
be displayed:

NACS
1=NAC 1
2=NAC 2

3=NAC 3
4=NAC 4

NAC Selection Screen
The Notification Appliance Circuits can be configured independently by pressing 1
for NAC 1, 2 for NAC 2, 3 for NAC 3 or 4 for NAC 4.
Note that 3=NAC 3 and 4=NAC 4 will be displayed, and can be programmed,
regardless of how the NACKEY card is installed. Their programming, however, will
have no effect if the NACKEY card is installed for Class A operation.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
The following screens will be displayed for each selection:

NAC #
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=SILENCEABLE

YES
BELL
YES

NAC Screen #1

NAC #
1=AUTO SILENCE
00
2=CODING
TEMPORAL
NAC Screen #2

NAC #
1=ZONE
00 00 00 00 00
2=SIL INHIBITED
NO
NAC Screen #3

NAC #
1=SYNC TYPE

NAC Screen #4

3.6.5.5.1 Enabled
Pressing 1 while viewing NAC Screen #1 will cause the display to change to
Enabled No. This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from activating
its devices. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between
Enabled Yes and Enabled No.
Note: The programming for NAC 1 will determine the operation of the remote
power supply sync.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming
NAC #
1=ENABLED
2=TYPE
3=SILENCEABLE

NAC Screen #1

Master Programming Level
3.6.5.5.2 Type
The main circuit board NAC type can be programmed by pressing 2 while viewing
NAC Screen #1. The following screen will be displayed. Press the down arrow key
to view additional screens:

NAC TYPE
1=BELL
2=HORN
3=STROBE
Type Screen #1

Select the NAC device type by pressing the number corresponding to the type in the
appropriate screen. When the selection is made, the display will return to NAC
Screen #1.
The following table contains NAC type codes and their functions:
NAC Type Code
Bell
Horn
Strobe
Synced Strobe
Strobe Sil Sync
Siren Circuit

Special Function
None
None
None
Synchronized to manufacturer
Same as Synced Strobe but Silence turns off audible & visual devices
None

3.6.5.5.3 Silenceable
Pressing 3 while viewing NAC Screen #1 will cause the display to change to
Silenceable No. This will prevent the selected main circuit board NAC from being
silenced by pressing the Alarm Silence key or by the Auto Silence feature. Each
press of the 3 key will cause the display to toggle between Silenceable Yes and
Silenceable No.
Important: When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual
devices is programmed for silenceable and the Synced Strobe feature is selected,
only the audible devices will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed or if the
Autosilence feature is enabled. The visual devices (strobes, etc.) will continue to
operate. If the Strobe Sil Sync feature is selected, Silence or Autosilence will turn
off both audible and visual devices.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

NAC #
1=AUTO SILENCE
2=CODING
TEMPORAL

NAC Screen #2

Programming
3.6.5.5.4 Auto Silence
The Auto Silence feature, when enabled, automatically silences all main circuit
board silenceable notification appliances after a programmed length of time. To
enable this feature and program the time delay before Auto Silence activation, press
1 while viewing NAC Screen #2. The following screens will be displayed:

AUTO SILENCE
1=NO
2=5 MINUTES
3=10 MINUTES
Auto Silence Screen #1

AUTO SILENCE
1=15 MINUTES
2=20 MINUTES
3=25 MINUTES
Auto Silence Screen #2

AUTO SILENCE
1=30 MINUTES

Auto Silence Screen #3
To disable the Auto Silence feature, press 1 for No while viewing Auto Silence
Screen #1. To enable the Auto Silence feature, press the number corresponding to
the time delay which will elapse before Auto Silence activates. This information
will be stored in memory and the display will return to NAC Screen #2.
Note: All silenceable control modules as well as the remote power supply sync will
be controlled by the Autosilence timer for NAC 1.
3.6.5.5.5 Coding (only for NACs not programmed as Sync Strobe Type)
The Coding feature allows the programmer to select the type of output that the main
circuit board notification appliances will generate when activated. Pressing 2 while
viewing NAC Screen #2 will cause the following displays to appear:

CODING
1=STEADY
2=MARCH TIME
3=CALIFORNIA
Coding Screen #1

CODING
1=TEMPORAL
2=TWO STAGE 3 MIN
3=TWO STAGE 5 MIN
Coding Screen #2

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
The programmer can select the notification appliance output by pressing the number
corresponding to the desired output. The coding selections are:
•
•
•
•
•

Steady - a continuous output with no coding
March Time - 120 ppm (pulse-per-minute) output
California - 10 seconds on and 5 seconds off
Temporal - ½ second on, ½ second off, ½ second on, ½ second off, ½ second on,
1½ second off
Two Stage - refer to "Two Stage Operation" on page 90 for a description
Selection of one of the above options will cause the control panel to store the
information in memory and return the display to NAC Screen #2, which will display
the new coding choice.
3.6.5.5.5.1 Two Stage Operation
Two Stage operation consists of the following:
•

1st stage output - 20 ppm (pulse-per-minute) coding

•

2nd stage output - Temporal coding as described above

If Two Stage operation is programmed as the Coding option, the following sequence
of events will occur during an alarm.
1. The on-board NACs which are programmed to General Alarm Zone 0 will
activate with a 1st stage output upon activation of any alarm point
2. If the activated alarm point is directly mapped to a zone which is programmed
to an on-board NAC, that NAC will go directly to 2nd stage coding output.
All other NACs not directly mapped to the activated alarm point’s zone but
assigned to Zone 0 will activate with a 1st stage output
3. If, after the programmed time of 3 or 5 minutes, the Acknowledge switch has
not been pressed, all NACs presently in 1st stage activation will go to 2nd
stage activation
4. If an Acknowledge switch has been pressed, any NACs currently in 1st stage
activation will remain in 1st stage. Pressing the Acknowledge switch does
not affect NACs already in 2nd stage activation
5. If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer is counting, the
alarm point will have no effect on the NACs unless the alarm point’s zones
are directly mapped to one of the NACs, in which case it will follow the
procedure outlined in step 2
6. If another alarm point is activated and the countdown timer has stopped
counting due to the Acknowledge switch being pressed, the countdown timer
will restart and the NACs will respond as outlined in step 2. NACs already in
2nd stage activation will not be affected
7. Any control modules assigned to special Zone 99 will be activated either by
direct mapping of an input device programmed to Zone 99 or if the timer
counts down to zero
8. Control modules that are programmed to the same zone as the activated input
device will not be delayed for activation

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

NAC #
1=ZONE
00 00 00 00 00
2=SIL INHIBITED NO

Programming
3.6.5.5.6 Zone
A maximum of five zones can be programmed to each main circuit board NAC.
Pressing 1 while viewing NAC Screen #3 displays the following screen:

NAC Screen #3

ZONE ASSIGNMENT
Z00 Z** Z** Z** Z**

Zone Screen
Note that Z** represents the Zone Number(s) corresponding to the selected NAC.
The factory default for an unprogrammed device is Z00 for general alarm zone. A
flashing cursor will appear on the first 0 to the left. Enter the two digit number
corresponding to the zone that is to be assigned to this NAC. The cursor moves to
the next Z** designation. Continue entering zone assignments or the remaining
zones can be left blank or programmed as general alarm zone Z00. When all
desired changes have been made, press the Enter key to store the zone assignments.
The display will return to the NAC Screen #3 which will show the zone assignments
just entered.
3.6.5.5.7 Silence Inhibited
The Silence Inhibit feature, when enabled, prevents the silencing of the selected
main circuit board NAC for a period of one minute. Resetting the FACP will also
be prevented for one minute while the NAC programmed for silence inhibit is
activated. Pressing 2 while viewing NAC Screen #3 will cause the display to
change from the factory default of Silence Inhibit No to Silence Inhibit Yes. Each
press of the 2 key will cause the display to toggle between the two options.
NAC #
1=SYNC TYPE

NAC Screen #4

3.6.5.5.8 Sync Type
If synchronized strobes were selected as the Type of device installed, the type of
synchronization must be selected in this option. Pressing 1 while viewing NAC
Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

NAC SYNC TYPE
1=SYSTEM SENSOR
2=WHEELOCK
3=GENTEX
Pressing 1 while viewing this screen will select System Sensor synchronization, 2
will select Wheelock and 3 will select Gentex.
3.6.5.5.8.1 Maximum Number of Strobes for Synchronization
The total current draw for each Notification Appliance Circuit cannot exceed 2.5
amps. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation supplied with the Strobes to
determine the maximum current draw for each strobe and ensure that the circuit
maximum is not exceeded.
To ensure proper strobe and circuit operation, there is also a limit to the number of
strobes that can be attached to each circuit. Following is a list of the strobes that
have been tested with this FACP and the maximum number that can be connected to
each NAC. Make sure that the NAC maximum current is not exceeded:
System Sensor: 40 Strobes
Wheelock: 25 Strobes
Gentex: 23 Strobes

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming
SYSTEM SETUP
1=TIMERS
2=NAC
3=RELAYS

System Setup Screen #2

Master Programming Level

3.6.5.6 Relays
Pressing 3 while viewing System Setup Screen #2 will allow the programmer to
configure two of the three main circuit board Form-C relays. The following screen
will be displayed:

RELAYS
1=RELAY 1
2=RELAY 2
3=RELAY 3
Relays Selection Screen
To program Relay 1 or Relay 3, press the number corresponding to the selected
relay. Note that Relay 2 is fixed as a Trouble relay. Selecting Relay 2 will have no
effect on its programming. The following screen will appear for each relay to be
programmed:

RELAY #
1=TYPE
ALARM
Relay Type Screen
Pressing 1 for Type while viewing the Relay Screen will cause the following
screens to be displayed:

RELAY
1=ALARM
2=SUPERVISORY
3=SUPERVISORY AR
Relay Screen #1

RELAY
1=PROCMON AR
2=AC LOSS
3=HAZARD
Relay Screen #3

RELAY
1=TROUBLE
2=COMM FAIL
3=PROCESS-MON

RELAY
1=MEDICAL

Relay Screen #2

Relay Screen #4
While viewing the selected screen, press the number corresponding to the desired
relay type to program the main circuit board relay. The choice will be stored in
memory and the display will return to the Relay Type Screen which will show the
programmed type choice. Press the Escape key to return to the Relays Selection
Screen and repeat the preceding procedure for the remaining relays.
Note: AR in SUPERVISORY AR and PROCMON AR indicates AutoResettable
which means that the relay will not latch when either of these conditions occur. If
the corresponding condition is cleared, the relay will return to its normal state
without the necessity of resetting the control panel.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

SYSTEM SETUP
1=CANADIAN OPT. OFF
2=WATERFLOW SIL. NO

System Setup Screen #3

Programming

3.6.5.7 Canadian Option
Pressing 1 while viewing System Setup Screen #3 will allow the programmer to
configure the system to automatically monitor addressable ionization smoke
detector sensitivity using Canadian specifications. The display will change to
Canadian Opt. On. Each press of the 1 key will cause the display to toggle between
Canadian Opt. On and Canadian Opt. Off.:

SYSTEM SETUP
1=CANADIAN OPT. OFF
2=WATERFLOW SIL. NO
Relays Selection Screen

3.6.5.8 Waterflow Silenceable
Pressing 2 while viewing System Setup Screen #3 will allow the programmer to
configure the system for silenceable on nonsilenceable waterflow circuits. Each
press of the 2 key will toggle the display between Waterflow Sil. No and Waterflow
Sil. Yes. When Waterflow Sil. No is selected, all output devices associated with a
waterflow type input device, will be nonsilenceable. When Waterflow Sil. Yes is
selected, all output devices associated with a waterflow type input device, will be
silenceable.

3.6.6 Verify Loop
PROGRAMMING
1=LOOP SETUP
2=SYSTEM SETUP
3=VERIFY LOOP

Programming Screen #2

Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #2, will select the Verify Loop option.
During loop verification, the FACP polls each device on the SLC to determine if the
device is communicating and whether or not it responds with the proper type
identification. The following screen will be displayed while verification is in progress:

VERIFYING LOOPS
PLEASE WAIT
Verification Progress Screen

When Loop verification has been completed, the display will indicate that the system is
OK or, if problems have been detected, any device type programming errors. Use the
up and down arrow keys to view all detected errors.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

3.6.7 History
PROGRAMMING
1=HISTORY
2=WALKTEST
3=OPTION MODULES

The History option allows an authorized user to view or erase events which have
occurred in the control panel. Pressing 1 while viewing Programming Screen #3 will
display the History options as shown in the following display:

Programming Screen #3

HISTORY
1=VIEW EVENTS
2=ERASE HISTORY
History Screen

HISTORY
1=VIEW EVENTS
2=ERASE HISTORY

History Screen

3.6.7.1 View Events
Pressing 1 while viewing the History Screen will allow the user to select the events
to be viewed as illustrated in the following:

HISTORY
1=VIEW ALL
2=VIEW ALARMS
3=VIEW OTHER EVENTS
View Events Screen
While displaying the View Events screen, press 1 to view all events, 2 to view only
alarms or 3 to view other events. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through
all of the displayed events.

3.6.7.2 Erase History
The Erase History option allows a user to erase all events from the history file. This
will provide a clean slate in order to use the history file to track future events.
Pressing 2 while viewing the History Screen will display the following screen:

ERASE HISTORY
PROCEED ?
1=YES
2=NO
Erase History Screen
Pressing 1 while viewing the Erase History Screen will erase all events from the
History file. During this process, the display will read as follows:

ERASING HISTORY
PLEASE WAIT
Erase History Wait Screen
After the History file has been erased, the display will return to the History Screen.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming

3.6.8 Walktest
PROGRAMMING
1=HISTORY
2=WALKTEST
3=OPTION MODULES

Walktest allows an individual to test the fire alarm system without the necessity to reset
the control panel after each device activation. Pressing 2 while viewing the
Programming Screen #3 will cause the following Walktest options to be displayed:

Programming Screen #3

WALKTEST
1=SILENT
2=AUDIBLE
3=VIEW RESULT
Walktest Screen
To perform a silent walktest which will not sound the NACs, press 1 while viewing the
Walktest Screen. To perform an audible walktest, which will sound the NACs, press 2
while viewing the Walktest Screen. When either option is chosen, the panel will enter
Walktest Mode and the following screen will be displayed:

UNIT IN WALKTEST

Walktest Active Screen
The user can now perform a one-person walktest by activating devices throughout the
system. As each device is activated, the screen will display the information about the
activated device as shown below. Note that the colon (:) in the time is replaced with an
asterisk (*) to distinguish the walktest screen from an actual alarm screen.

ALARM PULL STATION

Z000
10*00A 010801 1M001
After completion of the Walktest, press the Esc (Escape) key to exit Walktest Mode and
return to the Walktest Screen. The results of the Walktest can now be viewed by
pressing 3 while viewing the Walktest Screen. The following screen will be displayed:

WALKTEST RESULTS

View Result Screen
Use the up and down arrow keys to view all of the walktest results which will be
displayed as illustrated in the preceding screen. Note that the Walktest log is stored in
RAM. If all power (AC and DC) is removed from the FACP, the Walktest log
information will be lost. This information is also overwritten when subsequent
walktests are performed.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level

3.6.9 Option Modules
PROGRAMMING
1=HISTORY
2=WALKTEST
3=OPTION MODULES

Programming Screen #3

Options available for the MS-9200UDLS include ACS Series, Graphic and LCD
annunciators, printer connection for acquiring hardcopy printouts of panel data and PC
(Personal Computer) connection for uploading and downloading panel data.
Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #3 will display the following screen:

OPTION MODULES
1=ANNUNCIATORS/UDACT
2=ONBOARD DACT
3=PRINTER/PC PR4800
Options Screen
Note that PR4800 in the display indicates that a supervised printer, configured for 4800
baud, has been previously programmed into the system.

3.6.9.1 Annunciators/UDACT
Pressing 1 while viewing the Options Screen will cause the control panel to display
the following screens:

ANNUNCIATOR
1=TERM ENABLED
2=ACS ENABLED
3=UDACT

YES
YES
YES

Annunciator Screen #1

ANNUNCIATOR
1=ACS INSTALLED

Annunciator Screen #2
A Terminal Mode annunciator* and ACS Mode annunciator can be installed in the
MS-9200UDLS system. To enable any of these devices, press the number
corresponding to the selected device shown in Annunciator Screen #1 so that Yes
appears in the display to the right of the device. Each press of the corresponding
number key will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled No.
Notes:
1. *The LCD-80F is a Terminal Mode annunciator. To enable the MS-9200UDLS
for LCD-80F operation, program Term Enabled to Yes.
2. The Terminal Mode annunciator (LCD-80F) and the Printer/PC use the same
TB8 terminal block on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board. Only one device
can be connected at one time, therefore, programming Term Enabled to Yes will
disable any Printer/PC communications.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
If an ACS annunciator is installed, press 1 while viewing Annunciator Screen #2 to
select addresses for the ACS annunciators. The following screen will be displayed:

ANNUNCIATOR
1=ADDRESS 1
2=ADDRESS 2
3=ADDRESS 3

YES
NO
NO

ACS Installed Screen
Pressing the down arrow key will allow the programmer to view additional screens
displaying Addresses 1 -31. To select one or more addresses for the installed ACS
annunciator(s), press the number key corresponding to the address in each screen.
The display for the selected address will change from No to Yes. Each press of the
number key will cause the display to toggle between No and Yes.
OPTION MODULES
1=ANNUNCIATORS/UDACT
2=ON BOARD DACT
3=PRINTER/PC

3.6.9.2 Onboard DACT
The Onboard DACT (Digital Alarm Communicator/Transmitter) provides
communication to a central station. Pressing 2 while viewing the Option Module
Screen will cause the following screens to be displayed:

Option Module Screen

ON BOARD DACT
1=ENABLED
YES
2=PRIMARY PHONE
3=SECONDARY PHONE
On Board DACT Screen #1

ON BOARD DACT
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=CENTRAL STATION
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE
On Board DACT Screen #2
3.6.9.2.1 Onboard DACT Enable
To enable the onboard DACT, press 1 while viewing Onboard DACT Screen #1
until the display reads Enabled Yes. The display will toggle between Enabled Yes
and Enabled No with each press of the key.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

Master Programming Level
3.6.9.2.2 Primary Phone
Press 2 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #1 to program the type of primary
phone line being connected to the DACT. The following screen will be displayed:

ON BOARD DACT
PRIMARY PHONE LINE
1=TYPE
TOUCHTONE

Primary Phone Line Screen
To select the type, press 1 while viewing the Primary Phone Line screen. The
following screen will be displayed:

PHONE LINE
1=TOUCHTONE
2=ROTARY 67/33
3=ROTARY 62/38
Primary Phone Type Screen

Press 1 to select Touchtone dialing, 2 to select Rotary dialing with a make/break
ratio of 67/33 or 3 to select Rotary dialing with a make/break ratio of 62/38.
ON BOARD DACT
1=ENABLED
2=PRIMARY PHONE
3=SECONDARY PHONE

On Board DACT Screen #1

3.6.9.2.3 Secondary Phone
Press 3 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #1 to program the type of secondary
phone line being connected to the DACT. The following screen will be displayed:

ON BOARD DACT
SECONDARY PHONE LINE
1=TYPE
TOUCHTONE

Secondary Phone Line Screen
To select the type, press 1 while viewing the Secondary Phone Line screen. The
following screen will be displayed:

PHONE LINE
1=TOUCHTONE
2=ROTARY 67/33
3=ROTARY 62/38
Secondary Phone Type Screen

Press 1 to select Touchtone dialing, 2 to select Rotary dialing with a make/break
ratio of 67/33 or 3 to select Rotary dialing with a make/break ratio of 62/38.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

ON BOARD DACT
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=CENTRAL STATION
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE

On Board DACT Screen #2

Programming
3.6.9.2.4 Service Terminal
The MS-9200UDLS can be programmed remotely from a PC using a modem and
telephone line. Information can also be retrieved from the FACP using the same
method. The Upload/Download option allows an operator to set the necessary
parameters to allow the uploading and downloading of data between the FACP and
PC. The Service Terminal selection provides the means for entering these
parameters.
Pressing 1 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #2 will cause the following
screens to appear:

SERVICE TERMINAL
1=PANEL ID
0000
2=TERMINAL 1
3=TERMINAL 2
Service Terminal Screen #1

SERVICE TERMINAL
1=RING COUNT
3

Service Terminal Screen #2
3.6.9.2.4.1 Panel ID
The Panel Identification Number is a 4-digit code (valid digits being 0 - 9 and A - F)
that is used to identify the installed FACP. It is important to program this code into
the FACP the first time that downloading is performed so that the called Service
Terminal can identify the control panel. The factory default is 0000.
To program the Panel ID, press 1 while viewing Service Terminal Screen #1. The
following screen will be displayed:

PANEL ID
4 CHARACTER 0-F

Panel ID Screen

A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Enter a 4-digit
code using the digits 0 - 9 and/or the letters A - F by entering the first character.
Press the right arrow key to move the cursor to the second position and enter the
second character. Follow the same procedure to enter the remaining characters.
After entering the fourth character, press the right arrow key and then press the
Enter key to store the Panel ID number.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programming

SERVICE TERMINAL
1=PANEL ID
2=TERMINAL 1
3=TERMINAL 2

Service Terminal Screen #1

Master Programming Level
3.6.9.2.4.2 Terminal 1 and Terminal 2
Service Terminal #1 is generally designated as the FACP primary phone line used
for receiving phone calls from the service terminal (PC) being used for remote
programming. Service Terminal 2 is referred to as the secondary phone line.
Pressing 2 for Terminal 1 or 3 for Terminal 2 while viewing Service Terminal
Screen #1 will display the following screen:

SERVICE TERMINAL #
1=PHONE NUMBER

Service Terminal # Screen

Phone Number (Service Terminal)
The Service Terminal Phone Number will be used by the control panel to contact
the service terminal. Pressing 1 while viewing the Service Terminal # Screen will
cause the following screen to be displayed:

PHONE NUMBER
20 NUMBERS MAXIMUM
Printer-PC Screen

A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner. Enter the phone number for
the service terminal by keying in the first digit, pressing the left arrow key and
entering the second digit. Continue this process until all desired numbers have been
entered (maximum of 20 characters). Press the Enter key to store the phone number
in memory and return the display to the Service Terminal # Screen.
Valid entries are 0 - 9 and A - F with the numeric digits as dialed numbers and
letters representing the following functions:

100

•

A = * on a Touchtone phone keypad

•

B = # on a Touchtone phone keypad

•

C = look for secondary dial tone for up to two seconds (then dial anyway)

•

D = three second pause

•

E = five second pause

•

F = end of phone number (F is automatically entered for unused entry
positions)

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

SERVICE TERMINAL
1=RING COUNT

Service Terminal Screen #2

Programming
3.6.9.2.4.3 Ring Count
The ring count designates the number of rings allowed on the phone line prior to
answering an incoming call from a service terminal. The factory default is 3 which
means the control panel will not answer an incoming call until 3 rings are detected.
This entry may be programmed for 1 to 25 rings. A setting of 00 prevents the panel
from answering incoming calls.
To change the Ring Count, press 1 while viewing the Service Terminal Screen #2.
The following screen will be displayed:

RING COUNT
0-25 RANGE
Ring Count Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the display. Enter the twodigit ring count which can be a value between 00 and 25. After the second digit is
entered, the display will return to the Service Terminal screen.
3.6.9.2.5 Central Station
Central Station programming configures the control panel DACT for contacting the
central station. Pressing 2 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #2 will cause the
following screens to be displayed:

ON BOARD DACT
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=CENTRAL STATION
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE

On Board DACT Screen #2

CENTRAL STATION
1=REPORTING DISABLED
2=REPORT
BACKUP
3=CALL LIMIT
Central Station Screen #1

CENTRAL STATION
1=PRIMARY
2=SECONDARY
3=REPORT STYLE
Central Station Screen #2

3.6.9.2.5.1 Reporting Enable
To enable the DACT for reporting FACP activity to the central station, press 1 while
viewing Central Station Screen #1 so the display reads Reporting Enabled. Each
press of the 1 key will toggle the display between Reporting Disabled and
Reporting Enabled.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

101

Programming

Master Programming Level
3.6.9.2.5.2 Backup Reporting
The DACT can be programmed to transmit reports to primary and/or secondary
central station phone numbers as a backup. Press 2 while viewing Central Station
Screen #1 to display the following screen:

BACKUP REPORTING
1=BACKUP ONLY
2=BOTH
3=FIRST AVAILABLE
Backup Reporting Screen

Press 1 to have all reports transmitted to the central station secondary phone number
as a backup only if the primary phone line fails, 2 to transmit all reports to both the
primary and secondary phone numbers all of the time or 3 to send reports to the first
available phone number.
3.6.9.2.6 Trouble Call Limit (Dialer Runaway Prevention)
The Call Limit option limits the number of DACT trouble calls to the Central
Station, to a programmed amount between 0 and 99, for each unique trouble within
a 24 hour period. Separate limit counters keep track of each unique type of trouble.
Note that the number of phone line (communication) faults called to the Central
Station are not limited by this feature. No subsequent restoral message is sent to the
Central Station(s) for a particular trouble whose call limit has been reached. Local
DACT annunciation will still track the particular trouble and restoral.
To set the Trouble Call Limit, press 3 while viewing Central Station Screen #1. The
following screen will be displayed.

TROUBLE CALL LIMIT
00-99 RANGE
*
Backup Reporting Screen

Enter a value between 00 and 99, then press Enter to set the Call Limit to this value.
Note: Entering a value of 00 will disable the Trouble Call Limit allowing the DACT
to call the Central Station an unlimited number of times.

102

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

CENTRAL STATION
1=PRIMARY
2=SECONDARY
3=REPORT STYLE

Programming
3.6.9.2.6.1 Central Station Primary and Secondary Phone Numbers
Pressing 1 for Primary or 2 for Secondary will display the following screens.
Note that the following information must be entered for both the Primary and
Secondary Central Station Phone Numbers.

Central Station Screen #2

CENTRAL STATION #
1=TEST TIME INT
24
2=ACCOUNT CODE
0000
3=24HR TST TIME 0021
Primary/Secondary Screen #1

CENTRAL STATION
1=PHONE NUMBER

Primary/Secondary Screen #2

CENTRAL STATION
1=COMM FORMAT
ADEMCO-CONTACT-ID
Primary/Secondary Screen #3

CENTRAL STATION
1=EVENT CODES

Primary/Secondary Screen #4

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

103

Programming

Master Programming Level
Test Time Interval

CENTRAL STATION
1=TEST TIME INT
2=ACCOUNT CODE
3=24HR TST TIME

Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #1 will cause the following
screens to be displayed:

Primary/Secondary Screen #1

TEST TIME INTERVAL
1=24 HOURS
2=12 HOURS
3=8 HOURS
Test Time Interval Screen #1

TEST TIME INTERVAL
1=6 HOURS

Test Time Interval Screen #2
The test report sent to the Central Station phone number may be sent once every 6,
8, 12 or 24 hours. Select the desired Test Time Interval by pressing the
corresponding digit in the screens shown above.
Account Code
Pressing 2 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #1 will cause the following
screen to be displayed:

ACCOUNT CODE
4 CHAR RANGE 0-F
Account Codes Screen

The Account Code, which is assigned by a Central Station, depends on the
communication format being used. The Account Code screen will have a flashing
cursor in the lower left corner. Enter the supplied account code using 0 - 9 and A- F
keys.

104

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
24 Hour Test Time
Pressing 3 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #1 will cause the following
screen to be displayed:

CENTRAL STATION
1=TEST TIME INT
2=ACCOUNT CODE
3=24HR TST TIME

24 HOUR TEST TIME

Primary/Secondary Screen #1

RANGE 0000-2359
24 Hour Test Time Screen
Use the 24 Hour Test Time screen to program the time that the DACT will transmit
the 24 Hour Test to the Central Station. A flashing cursor will appear in the lower
left corner of the screen. Enter a four digit number representing the test time using
military time (0000 = midnight and 2359 = 11:59PM).
Phone Number
CENTRAL STATION
1=PHONE NUMBER

Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #2 will cause the following
screen to be displayed:

Primary/Secondary Screen #2

PHONE NUMBER
20 NUMBERS MAXIMUM
Phone Number Screen
The Phone Number screen is used to enter the Central Station phone number that
the DACT will be contacting. A maximum of 20 characters can be entered with
valid entries being 0 - 9 and A - F where A = *, B = #, C = look for secondary dial
tone for up to 2 seconds (then dial anyway), D = 3 second pause, E = 5 second pause
and F = end of phone number (must be entered at end of phone number).
A flashing cursor will appear in the lower left corner of the screen. Enter the first
digit then press the right arrow key to move the cursor to the right one position.
Enter the second digit and repeat the process until all digits are entered. Press the
Enter key to store the phone number in memory.
Enter the digits as you would like the number to be dialed. For example, if it’s
necessary to dial 9 before dialing a number outside the building, you may wish to
pause after dialing 9. Enter 9 followed by D for a three second pause or E for a five
second pause then the phone number followed by an F to indicate the end of the
number.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

105

Programming

Master Programming Level
Communication Format

CENTRAL STATION
1=COMM FORMAT

Primary/Secondary Screen #3

Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #3 will cause the following
screens to be displayed:

COMM FORMAT
1=ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P1
2=ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P2
3=3P1S C18 A23
Comm Format Screen #1

COMM FORMAT
1=3P1E C18 A23
2=3P1S C19 A14
3=3P1E C19 A14
Comm Format Screen #2

COMM FORMAT
1=4P1S C18 A23
2=4P1E C18 A23
3=4P1S C19 A14
Comm Format Screen #3

COMM FORMAT
1=4P1E C19 A14
2=4P2S C18 A23
3=4P2E C18 A23
Comm Format Screen #4

COMM FORMAT
1=4P2S C19 A14
2=4P2E C19 A14
3=ADEMCO CONTACT ID
Comm Format Screen #5

106

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
The Communication Format is determined by the type of receiver that the DACT is
transmitting to. Consult your Central Station for proper selection or consult our
factory representatives. For any format chosen, the control panel automatically
programs all of the event codes.
Select the Communication Format by pressing the corresponding number key while
viewing the appropriate Comm Format screen. The following table describes each
format:
Table 3.1 Communication Formats
Screen Selection
ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P1
ADEMCO EXPRESS 4P2
3P1S C18 A23
3P1E C18 A23
3P1S C19 A14
3P1E C19 A14
4P1S C18 A23
4P1E C18 A23
4P1S C19 A14
4P1E C19 A14
4P2S C18 A23
4P2E C18 A23
4P2S C19 A14
4P2E C19 A14
ADEMCO CONTACT ID

Communication Format Description
4+1 Ademco Express Standard, DTMF, 1400/2300 ACK
4+2 Ademco Express Standard, DTMF, 1400/2300 ACK
3+1 Standard 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK
3+1 Expanded 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK
3+1 Standard 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK
3+1 Expanded 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK
4+1 Standard 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK
4+1 Expanded 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK
4+1 Standard 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK
4+1 Expanded 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK
4+2 Standard 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK
4+2 Expanded 1800 Hz Carrier, 2300 Hz ACK
4+2 Standard 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK
4+2 Expanded 1900 Hz Carrier, 1400 Hz ACK
Contact ID, DTMF, 1400/2300 ACK

Event Codes
CENTRAL STATION
1=EVENT CODES

Pressing 1 while viewing Primary/Secondary Screen #4 will cause the following
screen to be displayed:

EVENT CODES
1=PULL STATION
2=MON-USER-DEF-1
3=WATERFLOW

Primary/Secondary Screen #4

Event Code Screen
Pressing the down arrow key allows viewing of all Events associated with the
selected Communication Format. Pressing the number corresponding to the event
displayed in each screen will display its default event code which can be customized
by the programmer. For example, pressing 1 for Pull Station will display the
following screen which allows the Event Code to be changed from the default
value.

PULL STATION
ALARM

000

Event Code Screen
The tables on the following pages list all of the Events and their default Event
Codes for the various Communication Formats.
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

107

Programming

Master Programming Level
3+1, 4+1 Express and 4+1 Standard
The information shown in Table 3.2 is automatically programmed for the Central
Station phone number Event Codes when any of these Formats are selected. Enter 0
for an Event Code Setting to disable the report.
Table 3.2 Event Codes
Event Description
PULL STATION
MON-USER-DEF-1
WATERFLOW
MON-USER-DEF-2
SMOKE (PHOTO)
DET-USER-DEF-1
SMOKE (ION)
DET-USER-DEF-2
HEAT DETECT
DET-USER-DEF-3
SMOKE DUCT-P
DET-USER-DEF-4
DUCT SUPERVISORY
DET-USER-DEF-5
not used
not used
not used
not used
MONITOR
MON-USER-DEF-3
not used
not used
SMOKE CONVEN
MON-USER-DEF-5
HEAT DETECT
MON-USER-DEF-6
MEDIC ALERT
MON-USER-DEF-7
HAZARD ALERT
MON-USER-DEF-8
TORNADO ALRT
MON-USER-DEF-9
not used
not used
TAMPER
MON-USER-DEF-11
MON SUPERVISORY
MON-USER-DEF-12
MON SUPERV AUTO
MON-USER-DEF-13
POWER MON
MON-USER-DEF-14
TROUBLE MON
MON-USER-DEF-15
PROCESS MON

108

Event Code Settings
Active
Restoral
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
8
E
8
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
E
1
E
0
0
0
0
1
E
1
E
1
E
1
E
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
E
8
E
8
E
8
E
8
E
8
E
6
A
6
A
POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted
POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted
0
0

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Table 3.2 Event Codes (continued)
MON-USER-DEF-16
PROCMON AR
MON-USER-DEF-17
not used
not used
POINT_FAULT
POINT_DISABLE
AC_FAIL
DRILL
SLC OPEN FAULT
SLC SHORT FAULT
not used
not used
GROUND FAULT
LOW BATTERY
NO_BATTERY
TELCO LINE 1
TELCO LINE 2
COMM FAULT 1
COMM FAULT 2
TOTAL COMM FLT
PRINTER FAULT
NAC 1 FAULT
NAC 2 FAULT
NAC 3 FAULT
NAC 4 FAULT
not used
VOICE EVACUATION
ACS FAULT
LCD_80F FAULT
NAC 1 DISABLE
NAC 2 DISABLE
NAC 3 DISABLE
NAC 4 DISABLE
MEMORY FAULT
CHARGER FAULT
OPTION CARD 1 FAULT
REMOTE SYNC FAULT
not used
ZONE DISABLE
NAC_KEY_FLT
NO_DEVICES_INSTLLD
OFF_NORMAL_MESSAGE
24_HOUR_TEST
24 HOUR ABNORMAL TES
UPDOWN REQUEST
UPLOAD SUCCESS
DOWNLOAD SUCCESS
UPDOWN FAILURE
GENERAL_ALARM
GENERAL_SUPERVISORY

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

0
0
0
0
0
F
4
9
B
6
6
0
0
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
0
6
6
6
6
6
0
6
6
6
4
4
4
4
6
6
6
6
0
4
6
6
6
9
F
7
7
7
7
1
8

0
0
0
0
0
D
5
3
C
A
A
0
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
0
A
A
A
A
A
0
A
A
A
5
5
5
5
A
A
A
A
0
5
A
A
A
0
0
0
0
0
0
E
E

109

Programming

Master Programming Level
4+2 Standard, 4+2 Express, 3 + 1, 4 + 1 and 4+2 Expanded Formats
The information shown in Table 3.3 is automatically programmed for the Central
Station phone number Event Codes when any of these Formats are selected. Enter
00 for an Event Code Setting to disable the report.
Table 3.3 Event Codes

Event Description
PULL STATION
MON-USER-DEF-1
WATERFLOW
MON-USER-DEF-2
SMOKE (PHOTO)
DET-USER-DEF-1
SMOKE (ION)
DET-USER-DEF-2
HEAT DETECT
DET-USER-DEF-3
SMOKE DUCT-P
DET-USER-DEF-4
DUCT SUPERVISORY
DET-USER-DEF-5
not used
not used
not used
not used
MONITOR
MON-USER-DEF-3
not used
not used
SMOKE CONVEN
MON-USER-DEF-5
HEAT DETECT
MON-USER-DEF-6
MEDIC ALERT
MON-USER-DEF-7
HAZARD ALERT
MON-USER-DEF-8
TORNADO ALRT
MON-USER-DEF-9
not used
not used
TAMPER
MON-USER-DEF-11
MON SUPERVISORY
MON-USER-DEF-12
MON SUPERV AUTO
MON-USER-DEF-13
POWER MON
MON-USER-DEF-14
TROUBLE MON
MON-USER-DEF-15
PROCESS MON

110

Event Code Settings
Active
Restoral
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
81
E1
81
E1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
11
E1
11
E1
00
00
00
00
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
11
E1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
81
E1
81
E1
81
E1
81
E1
81
E1
81
E1
81
E1
81
E1
POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted
POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted
00
00

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming

Table 3.3 Event Codes (continued)
MON-USER-DEF-16
PROCMON AR
MON-USER-DEF-17
not used
not used
POINT_FAULT
POINT_DISABLE
AC_FAIL
DRILL
SLC OPEN FAULT
SLC SHORT FAULT
not used
not used
GROUND FAULT
LOW BATTERY
NO_BATTERY
TELCO LINE 1
TELCO LINE 2
COMM FAULT 1
COMM FAULT 2
TOTAL COMM FLT
PRINTER FAULT
NAC 1 FAULT
NAC 2 FAULT
NAC 3 FAULT
NAC 4 FAULT
not used
VOICE EVACUATION
ACS FAULT
LCD_80F FAULT
NAC 1 DISABLE
NAC 2 DISABLE
NAC 3 DISABLE
NAC 4 DISABLE
MEMORY FAULT
CHARGER FAULT
OPTION CARD 1 FAULT
REMOTE SYNC FAULT
not used
ZONE DISABLE
NAC_KEY_FLT
NO_DEVICES_INSTLLD
OFF_NORMAL_MESSAGE
24_HOUR_TEST
24 HOUR ABNORMAL TES
UPDOWN REQUEST
UPLOAD SUCCESS
DOWNLOAD SUCCESS
UPDOWN FAILURE
GENERAL_ALARM
GENERAL_SUPERVISORY

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

00
00
00
00
00
F1
41
92
97
43
44
00
00
61
62
63
64
65
6A
6B
00
6C
66
67
68
69
00
00
6D
6E
4B
4C
4D
4E
46
47
48
49
00
42
4B
4A
6F
99
FB
71
72
73
74
11
81

00
00
00
00
00
D1
51
93
98
53
54
00
00
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
AA
AB
00
AC
A6
A7
A8
A9
00
00
AD
AE
5B
5C
5D
5E
56
57
58
59
00
52
5B
5A
AF
00
00
00
00
00
00
E1
E2

111

Programming

Master Programming Level
Ademco Contact ID Format
The information shown in Table 3.4 is automatically programmed for the Central
Station phone number Event Codes when Ademco Contact ID Format is selected.
Enter 000 for an Event Code Setting to disable the report.
Table 3.4 Event Codes
Event Description
PULL STATION
MON-USER-DEF-1
WATERFLOW
MON-USER-DEF-2
SMOKE (PHOTO)
DET-USER-DEF-1
SMOKE (ION)
DET-USER-DEF-2
HEAT DETECT
DET-USER-DEF-3
SMOKE DUCT-P
DET-USER-DEF-4
DUCT SUPERVISORY
DET-USER-DEF-5
not used
not used
not used
not used
MONITOR
MON-USER-DEF-3
not used
not used
SMOKE CONVEN
MON-USER-DEF-5
HEAT DETECT
MON-USER-DEF-6
MEDIC ALERT
MON-USER-DEF-7
HAZARD ALERT
MON-USER-DEF-8
TORNADO ALRT
MON-USER-DEF-9
not used
not used
TAMPER
MON-USER-DEF-11
MON SUPERVISORY
MON-USER-DEF-12
MON SUPERV AUTO
MON-USER-DEF-13
POWER MON
MON-USER-DEF-14
TROUBLE MON
MON-USER-DEF-15
PROCESS MON

112

Event Code Settings
Active
115
115
113
113
111
111
111
111
114
114
116
116
200
200
000
000
000
000
110
110
000
000
111
111
114
114
100
100
150
150
150
150
000
000
144
144
200
200
200
200
330
330
POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted
POINT_FAULT code will always be transmitted
000

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Table 3.4 Event Codes (continued)
MON-USER-DEF-16
PROCMON AR
MON-USER-DEF-17
not used
not used
POINT_FAULT
POINT_DISABLE
AC_FAIL
DRILL
SLC OPEN FAULT
SLC SHORT FAULT
not used
not used
GROUND FAULT
LOW BATTERY
NO_BATTERY
TELCO LINE 1
TELCO LINE 2
COMM FAULT 1
COMM FAULT 2
TOTAL COMM FLT
PRINTER FAULT
NAC 1 FAULT
NAC 2 FAULT
NAC 3 FAULT
NAC 4 FAULT
not used
VOICE EVACUATION
ACS FAULT
LCD_80F FAULT
NAC 1 DISABLE
NAC 2 DISABLE
NAC 3 DISABLE
NAC 4 DISABLE
MEMORY FAULT
CHARGER FAULT
OPTION CARD 1 FAULT
REMOTE SYNC FAULT
not used
ZONE DISABLE
NAC_KEY_FLT
NO_DEVICES_INSTLLD
OFF_NORMAL_MESSAGE
24_HOUR_TEST
24 HOUR ABNORMAL TES
UPDOWN REQUEST
UPLOAD SUCCESS
DOWNLOAD SUCCESS
UPDOWN FAILURE
GENERAL_ALARM
GENERAL_SUPERVISORY

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

000
000
000
000
000
380
570
301
604
371
372
000
000
310
302
311
351
352
354
355
000
336
321
322
326
327
000
337
333
334
521
522
526
527
304
300
331
332
000
570
300
380
308
602
608
411
416
412
413
110
200

113

Programming

Master Programming Level
Report Style

CENTRAL STATION
1=PRIMARY
2=SECONDARY
3=REPORT STYLE POINT

Central Station Screen #2

Pressing 3 while viewing Central Station Screen #2 will cause the Report Style
display to toggle between Point and Zone. Setting the Report Style to Point will
program the DACT to report individual point status to the Central Station. The
control panel is capable of monitoring a total of 198 addressable devices. Setting
the Report Style to Zone will program the DACT to report zone status to the Central
Station. The control panel is capable of monitoring a total of 99 individual zones.
Notes:
1. Detector Address 01 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 01,
Detector Address 02 as Point 02, with reports continuing in a similar fashion all
the way up to Detector Address 99 which will be reported as Point 99.
2. Module Address 01 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 160,
Module Address 02 will be reported to the Central Station as Point 161, with
reports continuing in a similar fashion all the way up to Module Address 99
which will be reported as Point 258.

ON BOARD DACT
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=CENTRAL STATION
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE

On Board DACT Screen #2

3.6.9.2.7 Manual Dial Mode
Pressing 3 while viewing On Board DACT Screen #2 will cause the following
screen to be displayed:

MANUAL DIAL MODE
1=PRIMARY PHONE
2=SECONDARY PHONE

Pressing 1 for Primary Phone or 2 for Secondary Phone will display the following
screen:

MANUAL DIAL MODE
1=GO OFF HOOK
2=DIAL DIGIT(S)
3=GO ON HOOK

Pressing 1 for Go Off Hook will cause the DACT to access the selected phone line
(similar to taking the phone handset off the cradle). The selected phone line’s red
Active LED will turn on.
Pressing 2 for Dial Digit(s) will display a screen which allows the user to key in the
phone number to be dialed. The first digit is keyed in and then the right arrow key
is pressed to move the cursor to the next position. The next digit is keyed in and the
process is repeated until all digits have been entered. Pressing the Enter key will
cause the number just entered to be dialed.
Pressing 3 for Go On Hook will cause the DACT to hang-up, deselecting the
previously selected phone line. The phone line’s red Active LED will turn off.

114

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming

3.6.9.3 Printer/PC
OPTION MODULES
1=ANNUNCIATORS/UDACT
2=ON BOARD DACT
3=PRINTER/PC
NO

A Printer or a PC can be connected to the control panel. Pressing 3 while viewing
the Option Module Screen will cause the following screen to appear:

PRINTER-PC
1=PRINTER NO SU
2=PRINTER SU
3=PC

Option Module Screen

NO
YES
NO

Printer-PC Screen
Pressing 1 while viewing the Printer-PC Screen will program the control panel for
an unsupervised (NO SU) printer. The display will change to the Printer Baud Rate
Screen as shown below.
Pressing 2 while viewing the Printer-PC Screen will program the control panel for a
supervised (SU) printer. Printer supervision, when enabled, will typically detect the
removal of the printer cable and will detect when the printer power has been turned
off. Depending upon the brand of printer, other errors such as paper empty or
printer off-line may be detected.
The following screen will appear, which allows the programmer to select the baud
rate for the printer communication:

PRINTER BAUD RATE
1=2400 BAUD
2=4800 BAUD
3=9600 BAUD
Printer Baud Rate Screen
Pressing the number key corresponding to the desired baud rate (2 for 4800 Baud
for example) will program the control panel for the selected baud rate and return the
display to the Option Module Screen which will indicate Printer/PC PR4800 for a
supervised printer installed at 4800 baud rate.
Pressing 3 while viewing the Printer-PC Screen will program the control panel for a
PC connection. The display will return to the Option Module Screen which will
indicate Printer/PC PC for personal computer installed.
Note: The LCD-80F and the Printer/PC use the same TB8 terminal block. Only
one device can be used at any one time. Setting any option in the Printer/PC screen
to Yes will disable communications with the LCD-80F. The printer must be
installed in the same room and within 50 feet of the FACP.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

115

Programming

Master Programming Level

3.6.10 Password Change
PROGRAMMING
1=PASSWORD CHANGE
2=CLEAR PROGRAM
3=PROGRAM CHECK

The factory set passwords, which have been programmed into the control panel, can be
changed by selecting the Password Change option. Pressing 1 while viewing
Programming Screen #4 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

Programming Screen #4

PASSWORD CHANGE
1=MASTER
2=MAINTENANCE
Password Change Screen
Press 1 to change the Master Programming Level password or 2 to change the
Maintenance Level password. Note that the passwords will not be displayed on
LCD-80F annunciators.
The following screen will appear when either change option is selected:

ENTER NEW FIVE DIGIT
PASSWORD

Enter Password Screen
A flashing cursor will appear in the center of the display. Enter a new five digit
password (such as 10101 for the Master Level). After the fifth digit is entered, the
following screen will be displayed:

NEW MASTER
PASSWORD IS
10101
PRESS ENTER IF OK
Password Change Screen
Pressing the Enter key will program the new password into the control panel and return
the display to the Password Change Screen.

116

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming

3.6.11 Clear Program
PROGRAMMING
1=PASSWORD CHANGE
2=CLEAR PROGRAM
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Pressing 2 while viewing Programming Screen #4, will select the Clear Program
option. This will cause the LCD to display the following screen:

Programming Screen #4

CLEAR PROGRAM
1=WHOLE SYSTEM
2=ALL POINTS
Clear Program Screen #1

See Page

Pressing 1, for Whole System while viewing the Clear Program Screen #1, will clear all
general system programming options and all programmed addressable devices from the
nonvolatile memory of the FACP. This function is useful when the control panel is first
installed, prior to autoprogramming. Note that it is necessary to autoprogram after
using the Clear Whole System function.
Pressing 2, for ALL POINTS while viewing the Clear Program Screen #1, will clear all
programming related to the SLC loop and connected addressable devices.
Before executing any of the Clear commands listed above, the control panel will
provide a warning to the user by prompting with the following display:

WARNING!
SYSTEM CHANGE
PROCEED?
1=YES
2=NO

Pressing 1 will cause the control panel to carry out the selected clear option. Pressing 2
will prevent programming from being cleared.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

117

Programming

Master Programming Level

3.6.12 Program Check
PROGRAMMING
1=PASSWORD CHANGE
2=CLEAR PROGRAM
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Programming Screen #4

The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been
programmed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not
been programmed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output
correlations. Pressing 3 while viewing Programming Screen #4 will cause the
following screen to be displayed:

PROGRAMCHECK
1=NACS NO INPUT
2=ZONES NO INPUT
3=ZONES NO OUTPUT

Pressing 1 while viewing the Program Check screen will display an NAC screen similar
to the following.

Program Check Screen

NACS NO INPUT
NAC 1
25 31 44 55 67

The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 25, 31, 44, 55
and 67 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones. Use the up
and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for NAC 1,
NAC2, NAC 3 and NAC 4.
Note: If the NACs have been configured for Class A in the Setup option, only NAC1
and NAC 2 will display test information. NAC 3 and NAC 4 will display asterisks (*)
and will not be included in the test.

118

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Master Programming Level

Programming
Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the
following:

ZONES NO INPUT
05 07 09 10 11 1M001

The Zone No Input screen allows the programmer to view the zones which have not
been programmed to at least one input device (not including general alarm Zone 00).
The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05, 07, 09, 10 and 11 have
been programmed to an addressable module (control module in this example) with an
address of 001 on loop 1 but have not been programmed to any input devices. Use the
up and down arrow keys to view all the zones without input assignments.
Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the
following to be displayed:

ZONES NO OUTPUT
05 07 09 10 11 1D001

The Zone No Output feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have not
been programmed to at least one output device (not including general alarm Zone 00).
The example in the preceding screen indicates that Zones 05, 07, 09, 10 and 11 have
been programmed to an addressable detector with an address of 001 on loop 1 but have
not been programmed to any output devices. Use the up and down arrow keys to view
all the zones without output assignments.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

119

Programming

Maintenance Programming Level

3.7 Maintenance Programming Level
To access Maintenance Programming mode, press the Enter key. The LCD will display
the following:

1=READ STATUS
2=PROGRAMMING

To enter the Maintenance Programming mode, press 2. The display will read as
follows:

PROGRAMMING
ENTER PASSWORD

When the Maintenance level password (default 11111) is entered, the following screen
will appear:

PROGRAMMING
1=POINT PROGRAM
2=HISTORY
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Note that in the preceding screens, an arrow appears to inform the programmer that
additional options can be viewed by pressing the keypad down arrow key, as shown in
the following screen.

PROGRAMMING
1=WALKTEST
2=SYSTEM
3=ZONE SETUP

120

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Maintenance Programming Level

Programming

3.7.1 Disable Point
PROGRAMMING
1=POINT PROGRAM
2=HISTORY
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Pressing 1 for Point Program, while viewing Maintenance Screen #1 will cause the
following screens to be displayed:

Maintenance Screen #1

POINT PROGRAM
1=DETECTOR
2=MODULE

Device Select Screen
Select the device type by pressing 1 for an addressable detector or 2 for an addressable
module. The operator will be prompted to enter the three digit device address as shown
in the following example for a detector:

EDIT DETECTOR
ENTER POINT ADDRESS
***

Address Select Screen

A flashing cursor will appear in the bottom left corner of the display, prompting for the
three digit device address. When the third digit is enter, 001 for example, a screen will
appear which will allow enabling or disabling of the selected point, as illustrated in the
following example:

EDIT DETECTOR 1D001
1=ENABLED
YES

Enable/Disable Select Screen
Pressing 1 repeatedly will cause the display to toggle between Enabled Yes and Enabled
No.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

121

Programming

Maintenance Programming Level

3.7.2 History
PROGRAMMING
1=POINT PROGRAM
2=HISTORY
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Maintenance Screen #1

Pressing 2 while viewing Maintenance Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be
displayed:

HISTORY
1=VIEW EVENTS
2=ERASE HISTORY

History Screen
The History feature allows the operator to view control panel events which have been
stored in a history file in memory and erase the contents of the history file
Pressing 1 while viewing the History screen will cause the following screen to be
displayed:

HISTORY
1=VIEW ALL
2=VIEW ALARMS
3=VIEW OTHER EVENTS
Events Screen
To view all the events which have occurred in the control panel since the history file
was last erased, press 1 while viewing the Events screen. To view only alarms which
have occurred, press 2 while viewing the Events screen. To view events other than
alarms, press 3. The most recent event will be displayed on the screen. To view all of
the selected events, press the up or down arrow keys to scroll through the list of events.
If no events have occurred, the display will read NO EVENTS IN HISTORY.
Pressing 2 while viewing the History Screen will cause the following screen to be
displayed:

ERASE HISTORY
PROCEED ?
1=YES
2=NO

Erase History Screen

Pressing 1 while viewing the Erase History Screen will cause the message ERASING
HISTORY, PLEASE WAIT to be displayed. The display will then return to the History
Screen. Pressing 2 will cause the display to return to the History Screen without
erasing the History file.

122

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Maintenance Programming Level

Programming

3.7.3 Program Check
PROGRAMMING
1=POINT PROGRAM
2=HISTORY
3=PROGRAM CHECK

Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be
displayed:

Maintenance Screen #1

PROGRAMCHECK
1=NACS NO INPUT
2=ZONES NO INPUT
3=ZONE NO OUTPUT
Program Check Screen
The Program Check feature allows the programmer to view the zones which have been
programmed to the Notification Appliance Circuits on the control panel but have not
been programmed to Initiating Devices as well as other circuits with no input or output
correlations. Pressing 1 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen
similar to the following to be displayed.

NACS NO INPUT
NAC 1
25 31 44 55 67

The example above indicates that NAC 1 has been programmed to Zones 25, 31, 44, 55
and 67 but no input devices have been programmed to any of these zones. Use the up
and down arrow keys to view all the NAC zones without input assignments for both
NAC 1, NAC 2, NAC 3 and NAC 4.
Note: If the NACs have been configured for Class A in the Setup option, only NAC 1
and NAC2 will display test information. NAC 3 and NAC 4 will display asterisks (*)
and will not be included in the test.
Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen similar to the
following:

ZONES NO INPUT
05 07 09 10 11 1M001

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

123

Programming

Maintenance Programming Level
Pressing 3 while viewing Program Check screen will cause a screen similar to the
following to be displayed:

ZONES NO OUTPUT
05 07 09 10 11 1D001

3.7.4 Walktest
PROGRAMMING
1=WALKTEST
2=SYSTEM
3=ZONE SETUP

To perform a walktest, press 1 while viewing Maintenance Screen #2. The following
screen will be displayed:

Maintenance Screen #2

WALKTEST
1=SILENT
2=AUDIBLE
3=VIEW RESULT
Walktest Screen
The operator can press 1 to perform a silent walktest or 2 to perform an audible
walktest. The display will read UNIT IN WALKTEST. To end the Walktest, press the
Esc (Escape) key.
Pressing 3 after the walktest has been completed, will allow the operator to view the
results of the walktest.

3.7.5 System
To program the time and date into the control panel, press 2 while viewing Maintenance
Screen #2. The following display will appear:

SYSTEMS
1=TIME/DATE

System Screen

124

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Maintenance Programming Level

Programming

Pressing 1 while viewing the System Screen will cause the following screen to be
displayed:

TIME AND DATE
1=TIME 01:00 AM
2=DATE 01-01-2001
12HR
Time and Date Screen

To change the time, press 1 to display the following screen:

ENTER TIME
01:00 AM
1=AM

2=PM

Time Screen

A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display. Enter the four digit number
corresponding to the time (0000 - 1259). When the fourth digit is entered, the cursor
will move one position to the right. Press 1 for AM or 2 for PM to complete entering
the time. The display will return to the Time and Date Screen displaying the new time.
To change the date, press 2 while viewing the Time and Date Screen. The following
screen will be displayed:

ENTER DATE
MONTH DAY YEAR
01-01-2001
Date Screen

A flashing cursor will appear on the left side of the display. Enter the two digit month,
two digit day and four digit year. The cursor will move one position to the right after
each entry. When the fourth digit of the year has been entered, the display will return to
the Time and Date Screen which will show the new date.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

125

Programming

Maintenance Programming Level

3.7.6 Zone Setup
PROGRAMMING
1=WALKTEST
2=SYSTEM
3=ZONE SETUP

Maintenance Screen #2

Pressing 3 while viewing Maintenance Screen #2 will display the following screen:

ZONE SETUP
1=ENABLE
2=DISABLE
3=ZONE 97 98 99
Zone Setup Screen
Pressing 1 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen:

ZONE TO ENABLE
Z

Enable Screen
A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z. To enable a zone, enter the two digit
zone number (00 - 99). After the second digit is entered, the zone will be enabled and
the cursor will return to the original position. The next zone to be enabled can then be
entered. Press Esc (Escape) to return to the previous screen.
Pressing 2 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen:

ZONE TO DISABLE
Z

Disable Screen

A flashing cursor appears to the right of the Z. To disable a zone, enter the two digit
zone number (00 - 99). After the second digit is entered, the zone will be disabled and
the cursor will return to the original position. The next zone to be disabled can then be
entered. Press Esc (Escape) to return to the previous screen.

126

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Maintenance Programming Level

Programming

Pressing 3 while viewing Zone Setup screen will display the following screen:

SPEC PURPOSE ZONE
1=PAS 97
OFF
2=PRE-SIGNAL 98 OFF
3=TWO STAGE 99
OFF
Disable Screen
Zones 97, 98 and 99 can be programmed for normal zone operation or for special
purpose applications. In the above illustration, the three zones are shown Off,
which means they can be programmed to function in the same manner as all other
zones, by assigning them to input and output devices in the Programming Zone
Assignment Screen.
Pressing 1 will cause the display to change to PAS 97 On. Each press of the 1 key
will cause the display to toggle between PAS 97 On and PAS 97 Off. When Zone 97
is programmed On, a PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) activation of any smoke
detector will cause Zone 97 to activate. By assigning Zone 97 to a control module
in the Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device connected to the
control module can be used to indicate a PAS condition in the control panel. Do not
assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate
a PAS condition.
Pressing 2 will cause the display to change to Pre-signal 98 On. Each press of the 2
key will cause the display to toggle between Pre-signal 98 On and Pre-signal 98
Off. When Zone 98 is programmed On, a Pre-signal activation of any device will
cause Zone 98 to activate. By assigning Zone 98 to a control module in the
Programming Zone Assignment Screen, an output device connected to the control
module can be used to indicate a Pre-signal condition in the control panel. Do not
assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance Circuit when using this zone to indicate
a Pre-signal condition.
Pressing 3 will cause the display to change to Two Stage 99 On. Each press of the 3
key will cause the display to toggle between Two Stage 99 On and Two Stage 99 Off.
Refer to "Two Stage Operation" on page 90 for a description of this feature.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

127

Operating Instructions

SECTION 4

Panel Control Buttons

Operating Instructions

4.1 Panel Control Buttons
4.1.1 Acknowledge/Step
The first press of the Acknowledge/Step key silences the piezo sounder, changes
flashing LEDs to steady and also changes the status field on the LCD display from
capital letters to small letters. When the piezo is silenced, an acknowledge message is
sent to the printer and the history file. Multiple active events are scrolled on the display
at a three second rate. Acknowledge also sends a silence piezo command to the optional
annunciators connected to the FACP.
When more than one event exists, the first press of the Acknowledge/Step key functions
as described in the preceding paragraph. The second press of the key stops the scrolling
and holds the event on the display for one minute. Subsequent pressing of the key steps
through each active event.

4.1.2 Alarm Silence
The Alarm Silence key performs the same functions as Acknowledge/Step. In addition,
if an alarm exists, it turns off all silenceable NACs (Notification Appliance Circuits)
and causes the Alarm Silenced LED to turn on. It also sends an ‘alarm silenced’
message to the printer, history file and optional annunciators. A subsequent new alarm
will resound the system NACs. Note that the Alarm Silenced LED is turned off by
pressing the Reset key, the Drill key or subsequent activation of the NACs.

4.1.3 Drill/Hold 2 Sec
When the Drill key is held for a minimum of two seconds (time required to prevent
accidental activations), the FACP turns on both main panel NAC outputs and all
silenceable circuits such as control modules that are programmed as silenceable, and
turns off the Alarm Silenced LED if it was previously on. The EVAC IN SYSTEM
message is shown on the LCD display. The same message is sent to the printer and
history file. The Alarm Silence key can be used to turn off all silenceable NAC outputs
following activation by the Drill key.

4.1.4 Reset
Pressing and releasing the Reset key turns off all control modules and NACs,
temporarily turns off resettable power to 4-wire detectors, causes a RESET IN SYSTEM
message to be displayed on the LCD and sends the same message to the printer and
history file. It also performs a lamp test by turning on all LEDs (except the Ground
LED), piezo sounder and LCD display segments after the Reset key is released. Any
alarm or trouble that exists after a reset will resound the system.

128

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

LED Indicators

Operating Instructions

4.2 LED Indicators
The nine LED indicators, which are located on the front panel, operate as follows:
AC Power
This is a green LED which illuminates if AC power is applied to the FACP. A loss of
AC power will turn off this LED
Fire Alarm
This red LED flashes when one or more alarms occur. It illuminates steady when the
Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed. The Fire Alarm LED turns off
when the Reset key is pressed. The LED will remain off if all alarms have been cleared.
Supervisory
This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more supervisory conditions occur, such
as a sprinkler valve tamper condition. It illuminates steady when the Acknowledge/Step
or Alarm Silence key is pressed. It turns off when the Reset key is pressed and remains
off if all supervisory alarms have been cleared.
Trouble
This is a yellow LED that flashes when one or more trouble conditions occur. It stays
on steady when the Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed. The LED turns
off when all trouble conditions are cleared. This LED will also illuminate if the
microprocessor watchdog circuit is activated.
Maintenance
This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate that a smoke detector requires cleaning or
replacement due to an invalid chamber reading or excessive drift.
Alarm Silenced
This is a yellow LED that turns on after the Alarm Silence key is pressed while an alarm
condition exists. It turns off when the Drill or Reset key is pressed.
Disabled
This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate that a zone, NAC, detector or module has
been temporarily disabled in programming by the user.
Battery
This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate a low battery voltage condition.
Ground
This is a yellow LED that flashes to indicate a ground fault condition (zero impedance
from the FACP to ground).
Primary Line Active
This is a red LED that indicates the primary phone line is active.
Secondary Line Active
This is a red LED that indicates the secondary phone line is active
Kiss-off
This is a green LED that blinks when a Central Station has acknowledged receipt of
each transmitted message or when a portion of upload or download data has been
accepted from a Service Terminal

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

129

Operating Instructions

Normal Operation

4.3 Normal Operation
With no alarms or troubles in the system, the display message is System All Normal
along with the current time and date as shown below. To set the time and date, refer to
the appropriate section in this manual.

HONEYWELL LIFE SAFETY
SYSTEM ALL NORMAL
10:00A 012102

The MS-9200UDLS performs the following functions at regular intervals while in
Normal mode:
Monitors AC input voltage and battery voltage
Monitors and reports status of SLC loop, option cards and control panel
Polls all devices on the SLC loop and flashes each device LED while checking
for valid replies, alarms, troubles, etc.
Refreshes LCD display and updates time
Scans control panel keypad for key presses
Performs autotest for all SLC devices
Tests memory
Updates and reads all communications busses (EIA-485, EIA-232, etc.)

4.4 Trouble Operation
With no alarms in the system, the detection of a trouble will cause the following:
•

The piezo to pulse 1 second On and 1 second Off

•

The system Trouble LED to flash one second On and one second Off

•

The trouble relay to activate

•

TROUBL with device type, noun/adjective, address and trouble description will
appear on the LCD display

•

The same message, along with the time and date, is sent to the optional printer
and the history buffer.

•

Communicate the trouble conditions to the Central Station

•

Terminate upload or download communications

Note that specific troubles will initiate additional actions; for example, loss of AC
power will turn off the AC Power LED, a ground fault will turn on the Ground LED,
etc.

130

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Trouble Operation

Operating Instructions
Addressable Smoke Detectors, Monitor Modules and Control Modules
For addressable devices connected to the SLC loop, the following is a typical message
that could appear on the LCD display for a device trouble:

TROUBL SMOKE (PHOTO)

INVREP
10:00A 010801 1D001
The information displayed in the above example provides the following information:
•

First line in display:
The type of event; in this example TROUBL indicating a device trouble
Device type identifier; in this example, SMOKE (PHOTO) indicates a
Photoelectric smoke detector. Other device type identifiers which can be
displayed include SMOKE (ION) for Ionization Detector, HEAT for Heat
Detector, CONTROL for Control Module and MONITOR for Monitor Module,
PULL STATION for a manual pull box, etc. Refer to "Edit Detector" on page
49, "Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module" on page 59 and "Edit Module
Screen for Control Modules" on page 68 for information on additional device
types.

•

Second line in display:
; refers to the user programmed adjective descriptor from library list
resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC.
; refers to the user programmed noun descriptor from library list
resident in the control panel or custom entry via PC.

•

Third line in display: INVREP indicates an invalid reply from the addressable
device. Other possible troubles include:
SHORT - indicating a shorted circuit on an addressable device
OPEN - indicating an open circuit on an addressable device
DIRTY1 - maintenance alert indicating that a detector is near but below the
allowed alarm limit and is in need of maintenance before the performance is
compromised
DIRTY2 - maintenance alert indicating that a detector needs immediate
maintenance since it has been within 80% of its alarm threshold for 24
hours
INVREP - maintenance alert indicating a hardware problem in the detector
TEST F - indicating a detector has failed the automatic test operation which
functionally checks its sensing chamber and electronics
INV ID - indicating that an incorrect device code (Type ID) has been
programmed for an installed device (for example, Photo has been
programmed but an Ion detector has been installed)

•

SW TBL - indicating a module has failed the testing of its Class A switching
relay
Fourth line in display:
Time; the current time in this example is 10:00A which represents 10:00 AM
Date; the current month, day and year in this example is 01 for January, 08 for
the 8th day of the month and 01 for the year 2001
Device Address; 1D001 in this example 1 represents SLC Loop, D represents
a detector and 001 represents device address 001

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

131

Operating Instructions

Alarm Operation
Pressing the Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence key will cause the pulsing piezo to
silence and the system Trouble LED to change from flashing to on steady. This block
acknowledgment occurs regardless of the number of troubles, alarms and supervisory
events active in the system. When the Acknowledge/Step key is pressed and at least one
new alarm or trouble exists in the system, the ‘acknowledge’ message is sent to the
printer and history file. If the trouble clears, either before or after the Acknowledge/
Step key is pressed, the ‘clear trouble’ message is sent to the printer and history file.
If all troubles clear and there are no supervisory or fire conditions active in the system,
the system returns to normal mode operation and the System All Normal message is
shown on the LCD display and sent to the history and printer files. The auto-restore
feature will restore cleared troubles even if the troubles were never acknowledged.
Note that pressing the Alarm Silence key when only troubles exist in the system will
have the same effect as pressing the Acknowledge/Step key except the Alarm Silenced
LED will light.
If multiple trouble conditions exist in the system, they will be automatically scrolled on
the LCD display at a three second rate. If a combination of alarms, troubles and/or
supervisory conditions simultaneously occur in the system, only the alarms are scrolled
on the display.

4.5 Alarm Operation
Alarm operation is similar to trouble operation with the following differences:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The piezo sounder produces a steady output as opposed to a pulsed output
The Fire Alarm LED flashes 1 second On and 1 second Off
The LCD displays Alarm along with the device name, type, address, adjective/
noun, associated zones and time/date
Communicate the alarm to the Central Station
Alarms latch and are not allowed to clear automatically
Alarms activate software zones if so programmed
Timers for Silence Inhibit, Autosilence and Trouble Reminder are started
Alarms activate the general alarm relay and general alarm zone Z00
The trouble relay is not activated
Store event in history buffer
Terminate upload or download communications

A typical alarm display would be as illustrated below:

ALARM PULL STATION

Z000
10:00A 010801 1M001
Note that the device type, which in this example is PULL STATION, can be any other
programmable alarm type.
The information displayed in the above example provides the following information:
•

First line in display:
The type of event; in this example ALARM indicating an alarm condition
Device type identifier; in this example, PULL STATION indicates a manual
pull box. Other device type identifiers which can be displayed include
SMOKE (ION) for Ionization Detector, HEAT for Heat Detector, CONTROL
for Control Module and MONITOR for Monitor Module, PULL STATION for
a manual pull box, etc. Refer to "Edit Detector" on page 49, "Edit Module
Screen for Monitor Module" on page 59 and "Edit Module Screen for Control
Modules" on page 68 for information on additional device types.

132

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Supervisory Operation

Operating Instructions
•

•

Third line in display: Z000 indicates the zone programmed to this device which,
in this example, is general alarm Zone 000. Note that a single device can be
programmed to five different zones but only the first zone will be displayed.

•

Fourth line in display:
Time; the current time in this example is 10:00A which represents 10:00 AM
Date; the current month, day and year in this example is 01 for January, 08 for
the 8th day of the month and 01 for the year 2001
Device Address; 1M001 in this example 1 represents SLC Loop, M represents
a module and 001 represents device address 001

4.6 Supervisory Operation
Supervisory operation is similar to alarm operation but with the following differences:
•

The piezo sounder pulses ½ second On and ½ second Off

•

The Supervisory LED flashes ½ second On and ½ second Off

•

The LCD displays the status label Active Supervisory along with the device
name, type, address, adjective/noun, associated zones and time/date

•

Communicate the supervisory condition to the Central Station

•

The supervisory relay is activated

•

The alarm relay is not activated

•

Silenced alarms are resounded

•

Timers are not started

•

Store event in history buffer

•

Terminate upload or download communications

A typical Supervisory event would be displayed as illustrated in the following:

ACTIVE SUPERVISORY

Z000
10:00A 010801 1M001

Note that, like alarms, supervisory signals latch (except when programmed for
supervisory autoresettable) and can be assigned to software zones. Supervisory alarms
do not cause resound as do other alarm conditions. Open circuits in supervisory wiring
are processed by the control panel the same way as other trouble conditions. Refer to
"Alarm Operation" on page 132, for a description of the information displayed on the
control panel LCD.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

133

Operating Instructions

Process Monitor Operation

4.7 Process Monitor Operation
Process Monitor operation will initiate the following events:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The piezo sounder pulses ¼ second On and ¼ second Off
The LCD displays a process monitor message along with the device name, type,
address, adjective/noun, associated zones and time/date
Communicate the process monitor condition to the Central Station
Relays programmed for process monitoring will be activated
The alarm relay is not activated
Silenced alarms are not resounded
Timers are not started
Store event in history buffer

Note that, like supervisories, process monitor signals latch (except when programmed
for process monitor autoresettable) and can be assigned to software zones.

4.8 Hazard/Tornado Condition Operation
Hazard/Tornado Condition operation will initiate the following events:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The piezo sounder pulses ½ second On, ½ second Off
The LCD displays a hazard message along with the device name, type, address,
adjective/noun, associated zones and time/date
Communicate the hazard condition to the Central Station
Relays programmed for hazard will be activated
The alarm relay is not activated
Silenced alarms are resounded
Timers are not started
Store event in history buffer
Supervisory LED flashes ½ second On, ½ second Off

Hazard conditions latch. They can be assigned to software zones.

4.9 Medical Alert Condition Operation
Medical Alert Condition operation will initiate the following events:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The piezo sounder ½ second On, ½ second Off
The LCD displays a medical alert message along with the device name, type,
address, adjective/noun, associated zones and time/date
Communicate the medical alert condition to the Central Station
Relays programmed for medical alert will be activated
The alarm relay is not activated
Silenced alarms are resounded
Timers are not started
Store event in history buffer
Supervisory LED flashes ½ second On, ½ second Off

Medical alert conditions latch. They can be assigned to software zones.

4.10 NAC Operation
There are four Style Y (Class B) or two Style Z (Class A) programmable NACs
(Notification Appliance Circuits) resident on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board.
All NACs may be programmed as silenceable or nonsilenceable and may also be
programmed for steady or coded operation. Coded operation provides a choice
between March Time, Temporal or California coding.

134

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Programmed Zone Operation

Operating Instructions

4.11 Programmed Zone Operation
Each addressable detector and monitor module can be assigned to a maximum of five
software alarm zones. A general alarm zone Z00 may be listed for output (control)
points, but it is not necessary to list Z00 for input points, since this is the default zone
for all alarm input devices. Zone Z00 is not activated by supervisory points.
When an input device alarms and is not disabled, it activates all software zones
assigned to it. An output device that is not disabled is turned on when any of the
software zones to which it is programmed become active. Only alarms, hazards/
tornado alerts can turn on any of the four main NACs.

4.12 Disable/Enable Operation
Input points which are disabled do not cause an alarm or any zone activation. Disabled
output points are held in the off state. All disabled points are treated as if they were in
trouble, with the exception being the status label that will be displayed is DISABL.

4.13 Waterflow Circuits Operation
If an alarm exists from a monitor module point that has a waterflow type code and its
mapped NAC control module outputs are programmed for nonsilenceable operation,
the Alarm Silence key will not function. Also, any output zone activated by a
waterflow device will not be silenceable if the Waterflow Silenceable option is set to
NO in system programming.

4.14 Detector Functions
Maintenance Alert
Each addressable detector is monitored by the control panel for its maintenance status.
If a detector is near but below the allowed alarm limit, a ‘maintenance alert’ message
will automatically be displayed, signaling that the detector is in need of servicing.
Automatic Test Operation
An automatic test of an addressable detector is performed each minute, resulting in a
complete SLC loop test in approximately 5 hours (if the loop has the maximum number
of devices installed). The detector’s sensing chamber and electronics are functionally
tested for normal, safe operation. A trouble message is displayed upon failure of this
test. A System Reset will clear this trouble.
Type Code Supervision
The FACP monitors addressable hardware device codes at slow intervals. Mismatch of
any type code, compared to the system program, will cause a device trouble.
System Alarm Verification
The control panel may be programmed to perform alarm verification to help eliminate
the nuisance of false alarms. Alarm verification applies to smoke detectors only.
Smoke Detector Data
Smoke detector data is monitored by the FACP, eliminating the need to test the
sensitivity of each detector at its location. A printout of each detector’s data can be
retrieved from the FACP using an optional printer or Windows© HyperTerminal.
Detector sensing ability can decrease with age and should be monitored as part of a
system’s routine maintenance.

4.15 Time Functions: Real-Time Clock
The MS-9200UDLS includes a crystal-based clock that provides time of day, date and
day of week. Time is displayed as 12 or 24 hour time with month/day/year and is stored
in RAM. Daylight savings time change-over is programmable and automatic. If both
AC and battery are lost, the time must be reset.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

135

Operating Instructions

Synchronized NAC Operation

4.16 Synchronized NAC Operation
Synchronization is a panel feature that controls the activation of notification appliances in such a
way that all devices will turn on and off at exactly the same time. This is particularly critical when
activating strobes which must be synchronized to avoid random activation and a potential hazard or
confusion. The FACP can be programmed to operate with a variety of manufacturer’s devices.
NAC synchronization can only be supported properly by the Remote Power Supply Sync Terminal,
which follows NAC 1 programming.
Important: When a Notification Appliance Circuit with a mix of audible and visual devices is
programmed for silenceable and the synchronization feature is selected, only the audible devices
will be turned off if the Silence key is pressed. The visual devices (strobes, etc.) will continue to
operate.

4.17 Coded Operation
The NAC circuits resident on the control panel main circuit board can be programmed for coded
operation. The available pulse rates which can be programmed for coded operation are as follows:
•
•
•

Continuous:
March Time:
Temporal Code:

•
•

California Code:
Two-Stage

Steady output with no pulsing
Pulses at 120 ppm (pulses per minute)
Pulses at ½ second On, ½ second Off, ½ second On, ½
second Off, ½ second On, 1½ second Off
10 seconds On, 5 seconds Off
Pulses at 20 ppm (pulses per minute) for 5 minutes and
then changes to on steady

4.18 Presignal
Presignal option programs an initiating device to delay the activation of NACs and/or control
modules while allowing visual verification by a person. Once a detector or monitor module
triggers an alarm, the onboard piezo sounds immediately, but the NACs are not activated for a user
programmed time duration of up to three minutes. Note that the alarm relay and communicator will
respond to the initial alarm immediately. In addition, Zone 98 will activate. This zone can be
programmed to a control module which may be used to activate a sounder or indicator which the
installer designates as a Presignal indication. Do not assign Zone 98 to a Notification Appliance
Circuit when using this zone to indicate a Pre-signal condition.
After the programmed delay, the NACs will activate if the source of the alarm is not cleared. Note
that if a second alarm occurs during the programmed time delay, the alarm will be processed
immediately, causing activation of the appropriate output zones. The events which occur upon
Presignal activation are as follows:
onboard piezo sounds immediately
control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point
control points programmed to Zone 98 will activate
annunciators (if enabled) will sound the local piezo, and pulse the alarm LED and zone
LED
outputs (NACs and control modules) of associated zones will be inhibited from activating
for a user programmed time delay of up to three minutes
second alarm occurring anytime during the time delay will cause immediate activation of
all associated outputs
Presignal does not affect monitor modules programmed as waterflow, supervisory, process
monitoring or remote switches. Presignal operation requires the approval of the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction.

136

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Positive Alarm Sequence

Operating Instructions

4.19 Positive Alarm Sequence
PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) option will program a smoke detector to delay panel
activation (including alarm relay and communicator) for a period of 15 seconds. Zone
97, however, will activate immediately and may be used to connect a signaling device
to indicate PAS activation. Do not assign Zone 97 to a Notification Appliance Circuit
when using this zone to indicate a PAS condition.
When a detector triggers an alarm, the onboard piezo sounds immediately, but the
NACs are prevented from activating for 15 seconds. This inhibit time is factory set and
cannot be changed. Pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge/Step key during the 15
second inhibit time will silence the piezo sounder and start a timer which prevents
activation of NACs for an additional time duration which can be user programmed for
up to three minutes. After the programmed delay, the NACs will activate if the source
of the alarm is not cleared. Note that if a second alarm occurs during either time delay,
the alarm will be processed immediately, causing activation of the appropriate output
zones. The events which occur upon PAS activation are as follows:
onboard piezo sounds immediately
control panel LCD display will indicate a presignal event and the active point
control points programmed to Zone 97 will activate
annunciators (if enabled) will sound the local piezo, and pulse the alarm LED
and zone LED
outputs (NACs and control modules) of associated zones will be inhibited
from activating for a factory set duration of 15 seconds
pressing the Alarm Silence or Acknowledge/Step key will start a timer which
inhibits output activation for additional time delay of up to three minutes
which is user programmable
second alarm occurring anytime during either time delay will cause immediate
activation of all associated outputs
PAS operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Note that the PAS BYPASS monitor type code, when activated, will inhibit the PAS
capability until the PAS BYPASS monitor is deactivated. While PAS is inhibited,
signaling devices will immediately place the control panel into alarm. This feature may
be employed by wiring a normally open device, such as a switch, to a monitor module
which has been programmed for PAS BYPASS.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

137

Operating Instructions

Special System Timers

4.20 Special System Timers
4.20.1 Silence Inhibit Timer
This option, if selected, prevents the Alarm Silence key from functioning for 60 seconds following
an alarm. A new alarm during the initial 60 second period will not cause the timer to restart with a
new 60 seconds. Silence Inhibit operation requires the approval of the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction.

4.20.2 Autosilence Timer
If Autosilence is selected, the notification appliances, programmed as silenceable, will
automatically be silenced after a programmable duration of from 5 to 30 minutes. Pressing the
Drill key will restart the timer. Autosilence operation requires the approval of the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction.

4.20.3 Trouble Reminder
If selected, this feature causes a reminding ‘beep’ every 15 seconds during an alarm (after the
Alarm Silence key is pressed) and every two minutes during a trouble condition (after the
Acknowledge/Step or Alarm Silence key is pressed). The ‘beeps’ from the onboard piezo sounder
will occur until the alarm or fault is cleared.
Note that if the trouble is not cleared within 24 hours, the piezo will resound, indicating that the
trouble condition still exists.

4.20.4 Waterflow Retard Timer
If selected, this option will delay the activation of a waterflow type alarm for a programmable time
duration from 1 to 90 seconds. This delay is in addition to any time delay inherent in the waterflow
device. This feature requires the approval of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.

138

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Walktest

Operating Instructions

4.20.5 Alarm Verification (None or One Minute)
If alarm verification is selected, an addressable smoke detector's alarm is ignored for a retard time
of 13 seconds and the detector's alarm condition is automatically reset. There will be no alarm
indication at the FACP during the Retard period. A confirmation period of 60 seconds follows,
during which a subsequent alarm from the same detector will cause the panel to immediately
activate the appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP. If a different detector
alarms any time during the first detector's verification period, the panel will immediately activate
all appropriate outputs and indicate the alarm condition at the FACP. If no additional detector
alarms occur within 73 seconds of the first alarm (13 second retard plus 60 second confirmation),
the timer resets and the panel is ready to verify any new detector alarms which may occur.
13 sec.

0 sec.
Detector Alarm Verification
(Retard + Confirmation)

Detector Goes Into Alarm

RETARD

Alarm Ignored

73 sec.
CONFIRMATION (60 seconds)

Control Panel Processes Alarm if Same Detector is Still in Alarm

Control Panel Immediately Processes Alarm

Different Detector Alarms
During First Detector's
Verification Period

Note: Alarm Verification is available only for addressable smoke detectors, not conventional smoke
detectors.

4.21 Walktest
Walktest is a feature which allows one person to test the fire alarm system. An audible walktest
will momentarily sound the Notification Appliance Circuits in the building and store the walktest
information in a file at the panel. A silent walktest will not sound the NACs but will store the
walktest information in a file which can be viewed at the panel. Disabled NAC devices will not
activate during walktest.
Alarm/Shorted Condition
When in audible Walktest, the panel responds to each new alarm and activates its programmed
control outputs for four seconds, if those outputs have been programmed for silenceable activation.
It also stores each alarm in the walktest history file which can be sent to an optional printer. The
stored display will be the same as if the device actually activated except the colon (:) in the time
stamp is replaced with an asterisk (*).
Open Condition
Addressable devices as well as all main circuit board NACs are monitored for fault conditions
during Walktest mode. When a new trouble condition occurs, the FACP will activate all NACs and
control modules programmed for Walktest, then shut them off after eight seconds.
While in Walktest, the trouble relay is activated and the system Trouble LED flashes (as in all of
the Program and status change operations). The alarm relay is not activated.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

139

Operating Instructions

Read Status

4.22 Read Status
Read Status functions do not require a password. The control panel will continue to provide fire
protection while in Read Status mode. This mode can be entered while the control panel is in alarm
or trouble. If a new alarm or trouble occurs during these functions, the Read Status is exited to
prevent confusion.
Read Status Entry
When the operator presses the control panel Enter key, the LCD will display the following:

1=READ STATUS MODE
2=PROGRAMMING MODE
3=MANUAL DIAL MODE

Pressing 1, while this screen is being displayed, will cause the control panel to enter the Read
Status mode which allows the user to view and print the programmed features and status of the
control panel.
The following screens will be displayed:

READ STATUS
1=SYSTEM POINT
2=ZONES
3=POWER
Read Status Screen #1

READ STATUS
1=TROUBLE REMINDER
2=TIMERS
3=NACS
Read Status Screen #2

READ STATUS
1=RELAYS
2=PROGRAM CHECK
3=HISTORY
Read Status Screen #3

140

READ STATUS
1=ANNUNCIATORS
2=PHONE LINE
3=CENTRAL STATION
Read Status Screen #4

READ STATUS
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=PRINTER/PC
3=PRINT
Read Status Screen #5

READ STATUS
1=TIME-DATE

Read Status Screen #6

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Operating Instructions

4.22.1 System Point
READ STATUS
1=SYSTEM POINT
2=ZONES
3=POWER

Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #1 will cause the following screen to be displayed:

READ SYSTEM POINT
SELECT TYPE
1=DETECTOR
2=MODULE

Read Status Screen #1

The operator selects the type of device which is to be viewed by pressing 1 for Detector or 2 for
Module. If 1 is pressed, the display will change to the following screen:

READ SYSTEM POINT
ENTER DETECTOR#
***

Entering the three digit detector address will cause the control panel to display the current status of
the selected device. For example, if a detector with address 001 on the SLC loop is entered, a
display similar to the following will appear:

NORMAL SMOKE(PHOTO)
NORTH CLASSROOM
Z005
V
1D001

The information in the preceding display includes:
•

NORMAL - the present status (could also be ALARM, TROUBL, DISABL, etc.)

•

SMOKE (PHOTO) - the device type which is a photoelectric smoke detector (could also be
ION for ionization smoke detector)

•

NORTH CLASSROOM - the Adjective/Noun label for this device

•

Z005 - the first of five possible assigned software zones

•

1D001 - 1 = SLC Loop, D = Detector, 001 = Address 001

•

V - Alarm Verification Enabled (V = Yes, * = No)

•

S - Silenceable for control modules (S = Yes, * = No)

•

W - Walktestable for control and monitor modules (W = Yes, * = No)

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

141

Operating Instructions

Read Status
Pressing the down arrow key, while viewing the screen shown above, will allow the
operator to view additional programming information about the selected device, such
as:
•

Enable/Disable Status

•

Device Type

•

Alarm Verification On/Off (for detectors)

•

Walktest Yes/No

•

PAS (Positive Alarm Sequence) Yes/No (for detectors only)

•

Pre-Signal Yes/No (for detectors and monitor modules)

•

Zone Assignments (five maximum)

•

Chamber Reading

•

Adjective/Noun descriptor

•

Silenceable Yes/No (for control modules)

4.22.2 Zones
READ STATUS
1=SYSTEM POINT
2=ZONES
3=POWER

Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #1 will cause the following screens to be
displayed:

Read Status Screen #1

ZONES
1=ZONES INSTALLED
2=ZONES ENABLED
3=ZONES DISABLED
Zones Screen #1

ZONES
1=SPECIAL PURPOSE
2=ZONE TYPE
3=ZONE MESSAGE
Zones Screen #2
From the preceding screens, the control panel operator can view:

142

•

Zones Installed - all software zones programmed into the system (99 maximum)

•

Zones Enabled - all software zones that are enabled

•

Zones Disabled - all software zones that have been disabled

•

Special Purpose - on or off programming for Special Purpose Zones 97 reserved
for PAS, 98 reserved for Pre-signal and 99 reserved for Two Stage

•

Zone Type - the Type assigned to each installed zone (default is Alarm)

•

Zone Message - the Message assigned to each installed zone

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Operating Instructions

4.22.3 Power
Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #1 will cause the following screens to be
displayed:

POWER
BATTERY
24 V RST

27.21V
25.31

Power Screen #1

POWER
CHARGER
NAC 1
NAC 2

28.36V
-1.49V
-1.49V

Power Screen #2

POWER
NAC 3
NAC 4

-1.49V
-1.49V

Power Screen #3
A real-time display of the control panel voltages can be used to determine if a problem
exists in the system. Note that Power Screen #3 will only be displayed if the NACKEY
NAC option card is installed, in JP8 of the main circuit board, for Class B operation.
The following table lists the circuit being measured, possible conditions and their
respective voltage ranges:
Circuit

Condition

Voltage Range

Normal Battery (nominal)

27.05 to 28.15 VDC

Low Battery

20.0 to 20.8 VDC

No Battery

0 to 18.36 VDC

24V Resettable

Normal

21.25 to 27.50 VDC

24V Nonresettable

Normal

21.25 to 27.50 VDC

Charger

Normal

21.87 to 29.84 VDC

Normal

-1.3 to -1.6 VDC

Open Circuit

-2.3 to -2.5 VDC

Short Circuit

0 to 1.0 VDC

Battery

NAC 1 or NAC 2

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

143

Operating Instructions

Read Status

4.22.4 Trouble Reminder
READ STATUS
1=TROUBLE REMINDER
2=TIMERS
3=NAC

Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #2 will display the following screen:

Read Status Screen #2

TROUBLE REMINDER
TROUBLE REM
ON

The screen indicates whether the Trouble Reminder feature is On or Off.

4.22.5 Timers
Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #2 will cause the following Timer screens
to be displayed:

TIMERS
PAS DELAY
PRE SIGNAL
WATERFLOW

TIMERS
AC LOSS DELAY

000
000
000

These screens will indicate the delay time, in seconds, for each of the first three
possible delay options. The AC Loss Delay time is displayed in hours.

144

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Operating Instructions

4.22.6 NAC
Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #2 will display the following screen:

NAC
1=NAC 1
2=NAC 2

3=NAC 3
4=NAC 4

Note that 3=NAC 3 and 4=NAC 4 will always be displayed regardless of how the
NACKEY NAC option card is installed.
The operator can press 1 to view the programmed options for NAC 1, 2 to view the
programmed options for NAC 2, 3 to view the programmed options for NAC 3 or 4 to
view the programmed options for NAC 4. The resulting screens will display the
following information:
•

Enable/Disable Status

•

Circuit Type (Bell, Strobe, etc.)

•

Silenceable/Nonsilenceable

•

Auto Silence Enable/Disable and time delay (in minutes)

•

Coding Selection (Temporal, Steady, etc.)

•

Zone Assignments

•

Silence Inhibit Enabled/Disabled

•

Synchronization Type (System Sensor, Wheelock or Gentex)

4.22.7 Relays
READ STATUS
1=RELAYS
2=PROGRAM CHECK
3=HISTORY

Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #3 will display the following screen:

Read Status Screen #3

RELAY
1=RELAY 1
2=RELAY 2
3=RELAY 3

The operator can view the programmed option for each relay by pressing the
corresponding number key.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

145

Operating Instructions

Read Status

4.22.8 Program Check
Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #3 will cause a screen similar to the
following to be displayed:

PROGRAM CHECK
1=NACS NO INPUT
2=ZONES NO INPUT
3=ZONES NO OUTPUT

Pressing 1 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will
indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to one of the Notification
Appliance Circuits. Use the up and down arrow keys to view all NACs.
Pressing 2 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will
indicate if any output zones have not been programmed to at least one input zone. Use
the up and down arrow keys to view all zones.
Pressing 3 while viewing the Program Check screen will display a screen which will
indicate if any input zones have not been programmed to at least one output zone. Use
the up and down arrow keys to view all zones.

4.22.9 History
Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #3 will display the following screen:

HISTORY
1=VIEW ALL
2=VIEW ALARMS
3=VIEW OTHER EVENTS

The operator can view all events which have been stored in the history file, only alarms
or other events, such as troubles or supervisories, by pressing the corresponding
number key.

146

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Operating Instructions

4.22.10 Annunciators
READ STATUS
1=ANNUNCIATORS
2=PHONE LINE
3=CENTRAL STATION

Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #4 will display the following screens:

ANNUNCIATORS
TERM ENABLED
YES
ACS ENABLED
YES
UDACT ENABLED
NO

Read Status Screen #4

Annunciator Screen #1

ANNUNCIATORS
1=ACS ADDRESS

Annunciator Screen #2

Annunciator Screen #1 indicates if Terminal Mode, ACS Mode and UDACT options
are enabled or disabled. Pressing ‘1’ while viewing Annunciator Screen #2 allows the
operator to view the ACS Mode Annunciator addresses which have been programmed
into the control panel.

4.22.11 Phone Line
Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #4 will display the following screen:

PHONE LINE
PRIMARY
TOUCHTONE
SECONDARY TOUCHTONE

This screen indicates the both the Primary and Secondary phone lines have been
configured for touchtone dialing operation.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

147

Operating Instructions

Read Status

4.22.12 Central Station
READ STATUS
1=ANNUNCIATORS
2=PHONE LINE
3=CENTRAL STATION

Pressing 3 while viewing Read Status Screen #4 will display the following screens:

Read Status Screen #4

CENTRAL STATION
REPORTING
ENABLED
REPORT
BOTH
CALL LIMIT
10
Central Station Screen #1

CENTRAL STATION
1=PRIMARY
2=SECONDARY
3=REPORT STYLE
Central Station Screen #2
Central Station Screen #1 indicates whether the Central Station Reporting is enabled or
disabled, if the Reports will be sent to one or both the Primary and Secondary Central
Station phone numbers and the Call Limit for DACT trouble calls within a 24 hour
period. Central Station Screen #2 provides information on the Primary and Secondary
Central Station programming which includes:

148

•

Test Time Interval

•

Account Code

•

24 Hour Test Time

•

Phone Number

•

Communication Format

•

Event Codes

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Operating Instructions

4.22.13 Service Terminal
READ STATUS
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=PRINTER/PC
3=PRINT

Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #5 will display the following screens:

SERVICE TERMINAL
PANEL ID
2=TERMINAL 1
3=TERMINAL 2

Read Status Screen #5

Service Terminal Screen #1

SERVICE TERMINAL
RING COUNT

Service Terminal Screen #2
The Panel ID number is displayed as the first item in Service Terminal Screen #1.
To view the phone number for each Service Terminal, press 2 for Terminal 1 or 3 for
Terminal 2 while viewing Service Terminal Screen #1.
The Ring Count is displayed in Service Terminal Screen #2.

4.22.14 Printer/PC
Pressing 2 while viewing Read Status Screen #5 will display the following screens:

PRINTER PC
PRINTER PC
PR4800
START BIT
STOP BIT
Printer/PC Screen #1

PRINTER PC
DATA BITS
PARITY
Printer/PC Screen #2

The display will inform the operator as to whether the control panel is configured for a
printer or a PC. In the example above, PR4800 indicates that the panel is configured for
a printer with a baud rate of 4,800.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

149

Operating Instructions

Read Status

4.22.15 Print
READ STATUS
1=SERVICE TERMINAL
2=PRINTER/PC
3=PRINT

To print program data or control panel status, press 3 while viewing Read Status Screen
#5. The following screens will be displayed:

Read Status Screen #5

PRINT
1=HISTORY
2=WALKTEST LOG
3=DETECTOR DATA
Print Screen #1

PRINT
1=EXIT PRINTING

Print Screen #2

Pressing 1 while viewing Print Screen #1 allows the user to print the History file which
will detail all of the system activities since the file was last cleared from memory.
Pressing 2 while viewing Print Screen #1 allows the user to print the Walktest log
which will detail all of the system activations during walktest since the log was last
cleared. Refer to "Walktest" on page 95 for additional information on the display.
Pressing 3 while viewing Print Screen #1 allows the user to print the detector data for
each addressable smoke detector connected to the system. A printout, similar to the
following example, will be generated if an optional printer is connected to the FACP.
DEVICE#

DEVICE TYPE

1D001
1D002
1D003
1D004
1D005
1D006
1D007
1D008
1D009

SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)
SMOKE (PHOTO)

%DRIFT COMP
20
20
21
20
21
20
20
20
20

CHAMBER
1281
1281
1259
1309
1281
1322
1280
1215
1310

TIME/DATE
12:01AM 01-08-2001
12:01AM 01-08-2001
12:01AM 01-08-2001
12:02AM 01-08-2001
12:02AM 01-08-2001
12:02AM 01-08-2001
12:02AM 01-08-2001
12:02AM 01-08-2001
12:02AM 01-08-2001

Chamber Value
The Chamber value should be within the indicated range for the following smoke
detectors:
•

SD350(T), D350P(R) and SD300(T) Addressable Photoelectric Smoke
Detectors: 405 - 2100 (obscuration of 1.00%/ft to 3.66%/ft.)

•

CP350 and CP300 Addressable Ionization Smoke Detectors: 750 - 2100
(obscuration of 0.50%/ft. to 1.44%/ft.)

If the addressable smoke detector’s Chamber reading is not within the acceptable range,
clean the detector and check the Chamber value again. If the reading is still not within
the acceptable range, immediately replace the detector.

150

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Operating Instructions
Drift Compensation
Drift compensation uses software algorithms that identify and compensate for longterm changes in the data readings from each addressable smoke detector. These longterm changes in detector data readings are typically caused by dirt and dust
accumulation inside the smoke chamber. Drift compensation performs the following
functions:
•

Allows a smoke detector to retain its original ability to detect actual smoke and
resist false alarms, even as dirt and dust accumulate

•

Reduces maintenance requirements by allowing the control panel to
automatically perform the periodic sensitivity measurements required by NFPA
Standard 72

The FACP software also provides filters to remove transient noise signals, usually
caused by electrical interference.
Maintenance Alert
The software determines when the drift compensation for a detector reaches an
unacceptable level that can compromise detector performance. When a detector
reaches an unacceptable level, the control panel indicates a maintenance alert. Table
4.1 summarizes the three levels of maintenance alert:
Maintenance Level

FACP Status Displays

Indicates

Low Chamber Value

INVREP

A hardware problem in the detector

Maintenance Alert

DIRTY1

Dust accumulation that is near but below the
allowed limit. DIRTY 1 indicates the need for
maintenance before the performance of the detector
is compromised

Maintenance Urgent

DIRTY2

Dust accumulation above the allowed limit.

Table 4.1 Maintenance Alert Levels
Figure 4.1 illustrates a graphic representation of the maintenance levels:

Maintenance
Urgent

DIRTY
Maintenance
Alert

Acceptable
Range
Low Chamber
Reading

LOW
VALUE

Figure 4.1 Diagram of Maintenance Levels

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

151

Operating Instructions

Read Status

4.22.16 Time-Date
READ STATUS
1=TIME-DATE

The operator can view the daylight savings time and the month and week when daylight
savings time will begin and end. Pressing 1 while viewing Read Status Screen #6 will
display the following screens:

Read Status Screen #6

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
ENABLED
YES
START MONTH
APR
START WEEK
WEEK-1

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
END MONTH
OCT
END WEEK
LAST-W

152

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Central Station Communications

SECTION 5

The control panel transmits zone and system status reports to Central Stations via the
public switched telephone network. Two supervised telephone line connections are
made to interface the control panel to the telephone lines. Two optional 7 foot
telephone cords are available for this purpose and can be purchased separately.
The control panel supervises both telephone lines for proper voltage. A delay of two
minutes will occur before a fault in either phone line connection is reported as a trouble.
When a fault is detected, an audible trouble signal will sound, the yellow trouble LED
will blink, the LCD display will indicate the phone line trouble and the trouble
condition will be reported to the Central Station over the remaining operational phone
line.
The control panel comes with line seizure capability provided for both the primary and
secondary telephone line interfaces. Any time that the control panel needs to make a
call to a Central Station, line seizure will disconnect any local premises phones sharing
the same telephone line.
All transmissions to the Central Stations will be sent over the primary phone line. In
the event of noisy phone lines, transmissions will be sent over the backup secondary
phone line.
Two phone numbers must be programmed, the primary Central Station phone number
and the secondary Central Station phone number. All system reports will be transmitted
to the primary Central Station phone number. Reports will automatically be sent to the
secondary Central Station phone number if attempts to transmits to the primary Central
Station phone number are unsuccessful. If 10 total attempts to communicate are
unsuccessful, a Communicator Failure report will be displayed. Note that as an option,
all reports may also be sent to the secondary Central Station phone number.
The MS-9200UDLS meets NFPA 72 National Fire Code reporting requirements for: (a)
the type of signal, (b) condition and (c) location of the reporting premises. The general
priority reporting structure is:
1. Zone Alarms and Restores
2. Zone Troubles and Restores
3. System Troubles and Restores
4. 24-hour Test

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

153

Central Station Communications

Read Status

The control panel is capable of reporting detailed messages depending upon the format
in use. Table 5.1 shows the reporting structure for all formats.
Table 5.1 Format Selection
Format

Format

Report

3+1/4+1/Standard
4+1 Express

3+1/4+1/Expanded

4+2/Standard
4+2 Express

4+2/Expanded

Alarm

SSS(S) A

SSS(S) A
AAA(A) Z

SSSS AA2

SSSS AZ

Alarm Restore

SSS(S) RA

SSS(S) RA
RARARA(RA) Z

SSSS RARA2

SSSS RAZ

Zone Trouble
(Zone Open)

SSS(S) TZ

SSS(S) TZ
TZTZTZ(TZ) Z

SSSS TZTZ2

SSSS TZZ

Zone Trouble Restore

SSS(S) RTZ

SSS(S) RTZ
RTZRTZRTZ(RTZ) Z

SSSS RTZRTZ2

SSSS RTZZ

System Trouble

SSS(S) TS

SSS(S) TS
TSTSTS(TS) Y

SSSS TSTS2

SSSS TSY

System Trouble Restore

SSS(S) RTS

SSS(S) RTS
RTSRTSRTS(RTS) Y

SSSS RTSRTS2

SSSS RTSY

Zone Disable

SSS(S) DZ

SSS(S) DZ
DZDZDZ(DZ) Z

SSSS DZDZ2

SSSS DZZ

Zone Disable Restore

SSS(S) RDZ

SSS(S) RDZ
RDZRDZRDZ(RDZ) Z

SSSS RDZRDZ2

SSSS RDZZ

Low Battery

SSS(S) L

SSS(S) L
LLL(L) L2

SSSS LL2

Low Battery Restore

SSS(S) RL

SSS(S) RL
RLRLRL(RL) RL2

SSSS RLRL2

AC Loss

SSS(S) P

SSS(S) P
PPP(P) P2

SSSS PP2

AC Loss Restore

SSS(S) RP

SSS(S) RP
RPRPRP(RP) RP2

SSSS RPRP2

Fire Drill

SSS(S) FD

SSS(S) FD
FDFDFD(FD) FD2

SSSS FDFD2

Fire Drill Restore

SSS(S) RFD

SSS(S) RFD
RFDRFDRFD(RFD) RFD2

SSSS RFDRFD2

Supervisory Condition

SSS(S) V

SSS(S) V
VVV(V) Z

SSSS VV2

SSSS VZ

Supervisory Condition
Restore

SSS(S) RV

SSS(S) RV
RVRVRV(RV) Z

SSSS RVRV2

SSSS RVZ

Test Report

SSS(S) X

SSSS XX2

Upload or Download

SSS(S) UD

SSS UDUD2

Refer to Table 5.2 for an explanation of each letter code in Table 5.1 . Refer to Table
5.3 for a list of compatible receivers.

154

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Read Status

Central Station Communications

Table 5.2 Format Selection Address Explanation
Where
SSS or SSSS
A
A2
Z
RA
RA2
TZ
TZ2
RTZ
RTZ2
TS
TS2
RTS
RTS2
DZ
DZ2
RDZ
RDZ2
L
L2
RL
RL2
P
P2
RP
RP2
FD
FD2
RFD
RFD2
V
V2
RV
RV2
X
X2
Y

UD
UD2

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
7=
8=
9=
A=
B=
C=
D=
E=
F=
=
=

Subscriber ID
Alarm (1st digit)
Alarm (2nd digit)
Zone Number
Alarm Restore (1st digit)
Alarm Restore (2nd digit)
Zone Trouble (1st digit)
Zone Trouble (2nd digit)
Zone Trouble Restore (1st digit)
Zone Trouble Restore (2nd digit)
System Trouble (1st digit)
System Trouble (2nd digit)
System Trouble Restore (1st digit)
System Trouble Restore (2nd digit)
Zone Disable (1st digit)
Zone Disable (2nd digit)
Zone Disable Restore (1st digit)
Zone Disable Restore (2nd digit)
Low Battery (1st digit)
Low Battery (2nd digit)
Low Battery Restore (1st digit)
Low Battery Restore (2nd digit)
AC Loss (1st digit)
AC Loss (2nd digit)
AC Loss Restore (1st digit)
AC Loss Restore (2nd digit)
Fire Drill (1st digit)
Fire Drill (2nd digit)
Fire Drill Restore (1st digit)
Fire Drill Restore (2nd digit)
Supervisory Condition (1st digit)
Supervisory Condition (2nd digit)
Supervisory Condition Restore (1st digit)
Supervisory Condition Restore (2nd digit)
Test Report (1st digit)
Test Report (2nd digit)
A trouble corresponding to the following:
Ground Fault
Low Battery
not used
Telco Primary Line Fault
Telco Secondary Line Fault
Main Bell Fault, Annunciator Bell
Communication Fault to Primary Number
Communication Fault to Secondary Number
System Off Normal Fault/System Fault (Slave Operation, see Chapter 6)
Upload/download (1st digit)
Upload/download (2nd digit)

Note: For Expanded Reporting, the control panel automatically adds the digit
corresponding to the zone number and the second digit corresponding to any system
trouble condition. Only the first digit is programmable.
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

155

Central Station Communications

Transmittal Priorities

5.1 Transmittal Priorities
The integral communicator transmits highest priority events first. Events, in terms of
priority, are listed below in descending order:
1. Alarms (highest priority level)
Pull stations
Waterflow
Smoke detector
Other alarm types
2. Supervisory Zone
3. System Troubles
Zone disabled
Fire drill
AC fail (after delay)
Zonal faults
Earth fault
Low battery
Telephone line fault
Notification Appliance Circuits fault
Communication trouble
Annunciator trouble
System off normal
4. Restoral Reports
Zone alarm
Supervisory
Zone(s) enabled
Fire drill
AC
Zone fault
Earth
Battery
Telephone line
Notification Appliance Circuits
Communication
Annunciator trouble
System off normal
5. 24 Hour Test (lowest priority)
Red LEDs are provided on the circuit board to identify which telephone line is
activated. Also, a green LED labeled Kissoff will turn on whenever the control panel
has successfully transmitted reports to the Central Station. The Kissoff LED may turn
on several times during communications with a Central Station.
The table below shows UL listed receivers which are compatible with the MS-

156

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Transmittal Priorities

Central Station Communications
9200UDLS.

4+1 Ademco Express

4+2 Ademco Express

3+1/Standard/1800/2300

(4)

3+1/Expanded/1800/2300

(4)

3+1/Standard/1900/1400

(4)

3+1/Expanded/1900/1400

(4)

4+1/Standard/1800/2300

(4)

4+1/Expanded/1800/2300

(4)

4+1/Standard/1900/1400

(4)

4+1/Expanded/1900/1400

(4)

4+2/Standard/1800/2300

(4)

4+2/Expanded/1800/2300

(4)

4+2/Standard/1900/1400

(4)

4+2/Expanded/1900/1400

(4)

Ademco Contact ID

Not Used

Surguard
MLR-2 (9)

Sescoa
3000R (7)

Radionics
6500 (5)

Radionics
6000 (6)

Osborne Hoffman
Models 1 & 2

FBI
CP220FB

ITI
CS-4000 (3)

Format #
(Addresses 16 & 42)

Silent Knight
9000 (2)

Ademco
685 (1)

Table 5.3 Compatible UL Listed Receivers

(8)

1. With 685-8 Line Card with Rev. 4.4d software
2. With 9002 Line Card Rev. 9035 software or 9032 Line Card with 9326A
software
3. Rev. 4.0 software
4. FBI CP220FB Rec-11 Line Card with Rev. 2.6 software and a memory card with
Rev. 3.8 software
5. Model 6500 with Rev. 600 software
6. Mode 6000 with Rev. 204 software
7. With Rev. B control card at Rev. 1.4 software and Rev. C line card at Rev. 1.5
software
8. Model 2 only
9. Version 1.62 software
IMPORTANT! It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the Digital Alarm
Communicator/Transmitter is compatible with the Central Station Receiver, utilized by
the monitoring service, prior to installation. The Compatibility Table provides a list of
compatible receivers and associated software versions for the receivers. Changes in the
hardware and/or software by the receiver manufacturers may affect the receiver
compatibility with the FACP DACT. After completing the installation, communication
between the DACT and Central Station Receiver must be tested and verified.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

157

Remote Site Upload/Download

Downloading Program

Remote Site Upload/Download

SECTION 6

The control panel may be programmed or interrogated off-site via the public switched
telephone network. Any personal computer with Windows™ 95 or greater, with a 14.4
Kbaud compatible modem and Upload/Download software kit P/N PK-CD, may serve
as a Service Terminal. This allows download of the entire program or upload of the
entire program, history file, walktest data, current status, system voltages, time and
date.
CAUTION: After successfully downloading a program, make certain to perform the
following steps:
1. Print out all programmed data via Print Mode or manually view programmed
entries and compare to intended program data
2. Test all affected panel operations
3. Immediately correct any problems found

6.1 Downloading Program
The first time that the control panel is downloaded (whether initiated at the jobsite or
remotely), a secret code is loaded in by a Service Terminal. Future upload or download
requests cause verification of the secret code by the control panel before processing of
data is allowed. If the secret code is not verified, the control panel will terminate the
request.
While the control panel is communicating with the Service Terminal, one of the
DACT’s red phone line active LEDs will remain on steady. At the conclusion of a
successful download, the green Kissoff LED will turn on steady for five seconds and the
red phone line active LED will turn off.
In order to download the panel (whether initiated at the jobsite or remotely), the
following must be true:
The control panel must be in the Normal Mode of operation. Downloading is
not possible if the panel is in any other mode
There cannot be any active communications ongoing with a Central Station
receiver
All active events must be successfully 'kissed-off' by the Central Station(s).
The communicator must be in a standby state with no new information waiting
to be transmitted to a Central Station
Two basic communication mechanisms are supported as follows:
•

Download with callback - the Service Terminal calls the control panel. The
control panel answers the call, confirms the calling party then hangs up. The
Service Terminal then waits for a callback from the control panel. After the
control panel calls the Central Station and successfully reports that a request for
downloading has been received, the control panel calls the Service Terminal
back. Upon secret code verification, data transfers occur. When the data
transfers are completed and the Service Terminal disconnects from the control
panel, the panel calls the Central Station back to confirm either successful or
unsuccessful results.

•

Download with callback disabled - the Service Terminal calls the control panel.
No hang-up sequence occurs. Data transfers proceed.
Note that Callback enable/disable is controlled by the master user at the Service
Terminal on a per call basis.

158

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Downloading Program

Remote Site Upload/Download
Anytime a download with callback is initiated, the first thing the control panel will do is
one of the following:
•

contact the primary Central Station

•

contact the primary and secondary Central Stations

•

contact the first available Central Station phone number

Once contact has been established, the control panel will report a ‘request for upload/
download’ message. Following ‘kissoff’ of the request by the Central Station(s), the
control panel will then call the appropriate Service Terminal and begin the downloading
process.
Any time a download with callback disabled is initiated, the control panel and the
Service Terminal will communicate and transfer data without first contacting a Central
Station. When the data transfers are completed and the control panel disconnects from
the Service Terminal, the control panel will call the Central Station and report one of
the following conditions:
•

Upload/download request received

•

Upload and/or download request successful

•

Upload/download failed

To prevent the 'request for upload/download' message(s) from being reported to the
Central Station(s), make certain to disable all upload/download reports back to both
Central Stations.
During the downloading process, the fire protection remains active. Should a system
trouble or alarm condition occur, the control panel immediately terminates
downloading and processes the trouble or alarm locally and transmits the information
to the Central Station(s).

6.1.1 Security Features
Remote site upload and download with the control panel has been carefully designed to
include key security features to ensure proper functionality. The key features are listed
and explained below.
Secret Code Verification
A secret code is stored in the control panel by a Service Terminal to prevent
unauthorized access. The secret code is created at the Service Terminal by the master
user and cannot be viewed or changed by anyone other than a master user. Viewing of
the secret code is prohibited at the control panel. Prior to allowing an upload or
download of data, the control panel will verify the secret code transmitted by the
Service Terminal.
Time-out at Control Panel
Upon answering an incoming call on either the primary or secondary Central Station
phone line, the control panel will listen for a modem connection signal. If this signal is
not received within 30 seconds, the control panel will disconnect the call. Upon
successful connection (secret code verified and callback completed if applicable), if no
communication occurs within five minutes, the panel will disconnect the call.
Callback to Service Terminal
Any time the control panel is requested to allow an upload or download, it will confirm
the source of the incoming call, hang-up and call back the calling party (Service
Terminal phone number).

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

159

Remote Site Upload/Download

Downloading Program

Panel Identification Number
The panel identification number is typically used to identify the panel to the Service
Terminal when the control panel calls the Service Terminal. If more than one call
comes into the Service Terminal, the control panel ID number is used to sort out the
calling parties.
Another use of this code allows for identical secret codes to be placed into multiple
control panels at one jobsite, using the panel ID number to distinguish between the
individual panels.
Error Checking
As each block of data is received by the control panel, it is checked for accuracy. If an
error is detected, the block is retransmitted until correct, up to a maximum of four
times. If the Secret Code is not verified and four errors occur, the call is disconnected
and the report that the upload/download was not successful is called to the Central
Station(s).
Central Station Acknowledge
There is an option, referred to as the ‘callback’ option, whereby the control panel will
report to one or both Central Stations that a request for uploading or downloading has
been received prior to processing the call. If the Central Station(s) does not
acknowledge receipt of this request, uploading or downloading is prohibited. If
acknowledged by the Central Station(s), another message is transmitted, informing the
Central Station(s) that:
•

Downloading was successful

•

Uploading was successful

•

Uploading/downloading was not successful

Central Station Data Protection
The primary and secondary Central Station phone numbers, communications format,
account code, test time and programmable event codes are vital Central Station
information. These blocks of data are protected from partial programming due to faulty
phone connections, line noise and other errors. This prevents the panel from being
confused due to a wrong phone number, account code, test time and most critical
formatting errors.

160

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Downloading Initiated at a Service Terminal

Remote Site Upload/Download

6.2 Downloading Initiated at a Service Terminal
Before initiating the download procedure, make certain that the control panel is:
In Normal Mode
Central Station communications are off
The communicator is in the standby state (red phone line active LEDs are off
and Kissoff LEDs are off)
Once the control panel accepts/answers an incoming call, the panel will:
1. Establish basic modem connection
2. Verify secret code and panel identification number
3. Verify callback vs. no callback request from the service terminal. If callback is
requested, steps 4 through 9 will occur. If no callback is requested, only steps 8
and 9 will occur
4. Identify the Service Terminal location
5. Hang-up/disconnect call
6. Call the Central Station(s) and transmit a request for upload/download message
(if programmed to do so). If this message is accepted, the control panel will
proceed to the next step
7. Return call to Service Terminal
8. After security clearance, begin downloading
9. Upon completion of download, call Central Station(s) back and report either a
successful download or failed upload/download message (if programmed to do
so)

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

161

Remote Site Upload/Download

Uploading Initiated at a Service Terminal

6.3 Uploading Initiated at a Service Terminal
Items that may be uploaded from the control panel to a Service Terminal are:
•

All programmed data plus the real-time clock, time and date

•

Entire Walktest data file

•

Troubleshoot Mode system voltages

•

Entire event History file

•

Current system status

Uploading is possible at any time provided the following conditions are true:
The control panel must be in the Normal Mode of operation. Uploading is not
possible if the panel is in any other mode
There cannot be any active communications ongoing with a Central Station
receiver
All active events must be successfully 'kissed-off' by the Central Station (the
communicator must be in a standby state with no new information waiting to
be transmitted to a Central Station)
Once an incoming call is accepted/answered by the control panel, the panel will:
1. Establish basic modem connection
2. Verify secret code and panel identification number
3. Verify callback vs. no callback request from the service terminal. If callback is
requested, steps 4 through 9 will occur. If no callback is requested, only steps 8
and 9 will occur
4. Identify the Service Terminal location
5. Hang-up/disconnect call
6. Call the Central Station(s) and transmit a request for upload/download message
(if programmed to do so). If this message is accepted, the control panel will
proceed to the next step
7. Return call to Service Terminal
8. After security clearance, begin uploading
9. Upon completion of upload, call Central Station(s) back and report either a
successful upload or failed upload/download message (if programmed to do so).
During the uploading process, the fire protection remains active. Should a system
trouble or alarm condition occur, the control panel immediately terminates uploading
and processes the trouble or alarm locally and transmits the information to the Central
Station(s).

162

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Overview

Power Supply Calculations

SECTION 7
7.1 Overview

This section contains instructions and tables for calculating power supply currents in
alarm and standby conditions. This is a four-step process, consisting of the following:
1. Calculating the total amount of AC branch circuit current required to operate the
system
2. Calculating the power supply load current for non-fire and fire alarm conditions
and calculating the secondary (battery) load
3. Calculating the size of batteries required to support the system if an AC power
loss occurs
4. Selecting the proper batteries for your system

7.2 Calculating the AC Branch Circuit
The control panel requires connection to a separate, dedicated AC branch circuit, which
must be labeled FIRE ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of
the main power feed of the protected premises. No other non-fire alarm equipment may
be powered from the fire alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run
continuously, without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the control
panel. Overcurrent protection for this circuit must comply with Article 760 of the
National Electrical Codes as well as local codes. Use 14 AWG (2.00 mm2) wire with
600 volt insulation for this branch circuit.
Use Table 7.1 , to determine the total amount of current, in AC amperes (A), that must
be supplied to the system.
Table 7.1 AC Branch Circuit Requirements
Device Type

Number of
Devices

MS-9200UDLS
or
MS-9200UDLSE

Current Draw
(AC amps)

Total Current
per Device

3.00
or
1.50

CHG-75

[

]

2.05

CHG-120F

[

]

2.00

[

]

[

]

Sum Column for AC Branch Current Required

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

=
=

163

Power Supply Calculations

Calculating the System Current Draw

7.3 Calculating the System Current Draw
7.3.1 Overview
The control panel must be able to power all internal and external devices continuously
during the non-fire alarm condition. To calculate the non-fire alarm load on the system
power supply when primary power is applied, use Calculation Column 1 in Table 7.3 on
page 165. The control panel must support a larger load current during a fire alarm condition. To calculate the fire alarm load on the power supply, use Calculation Column 2
in Table 7.3 on page 165. The secondary power source (batteries) must be able to
power the system during a primary power loss. To calculate the non-fire alarm load on
the secondary power source, use Calculation Column 3 in Table 7.3 on page 165.
When calculating current draw and the battery size, note the following:
• ‘Primary’ refers to the main power source for the control panel
• ‘Secondary’ refers to the control panel’s backup batteries
• All currents are given in amperes (A). Table 7.2 shows how to convert milliamperes and microamperes to full amperes.
Table 7.2 Converting to Full Amperes
To convert...

Multiply

Milliamperes (mA) to
amperes (A)

mA x 0.001

Microamperes (µA) to
amperes (A)

µA x 0.000001

Example
3 mA x 0.001 = 0.003A
300 µA x 0.000001 = 0.0003 A

7.3.2 How to Use Table 7.3 on page 165 to Calculate System
Current Draw
Use Table 7.3 on page 165 to calculate current draws as follows:
1. Enter the quantity of devices in all three columns
2. Enter the current draw where required. Refer to the Device Compatibility
Document for compatible devices and their current draw
3. Calculate the current draws for each in all columns
4. Sum the total current for each column
5. Copy the totals from Column 2 and Column 3 to Table 7.4 on page 166
Following are the types of current that can be entered into Table 7.3 on page 165:
Calculation Column 1 - The primary supply current load that the control
panel must support during a non-fire alarm condition, with AC power applied.
Calculation Column 2 - The primary supply current load that the control
panel must support during a fire alarm condition, with AC power applied.
Calculation Column 3 - The standby current drawn from the batteries in a
non-fire alarm condition during a loss of AC power.

164

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Calculating the System Current Draw

Power Supply Calculations

Table 7.3 contains columns for calculating current draws. For each column, calculate the current
and enter the total (in amperes) in the bottom row. When finished, copy the totals from Calculation
Column 2 and Calculation Column 3 to Table 7.4 on page 166.
Table 7.3 System Current Draw Calculations
Device Type
Main Circuit Board
ACM-8RF
ACM-16ATF
ACM-32AF
AEM-16ATF
AEM-32AF
AFM-16ATF
AFM-32AF
AFM-16AF
UDACT-F
LDM-32F
LDM-E32F
LCD-80F0
4XTMF
4-wire Detector Heads
Power Supervision
Relays6
CP350 & CP355
SD350 & SD355
SD350T & SD355T
AD350 & AD355
H350 & H355
H350R & H355R
H355HT
D350P & D350PL
D350RP & D350RPL
B501BH & B501BHT7
B224RB Relay Base
B224BI Isolator Base
MMF-300
MMF-300-10
MDF-300
MMF-301
MMF-302
MMF-302-6
BG-12LX
CMF-300
CMF-300-6
CRF-300
CRF-300-6
I300
NAC #18
NAC #2
NAC #3
NAC #4
Current Draw from TB3
(nonalarm9)
Sum each column10 for
totals

Calculation Column 1
Primary, Non-Fire Alarm Current
(amps)
Qty
1

Calculation Column 2
Primary, Fire Alarm Current
(amps)

[

]

X[current draw]=
X[0.300]=
X[0.030]=

[

]

X [current draw] =
X[0.325]=
X[0.158]1=

[

]

X[current draw]=
X[0.255]=
X[0.030]=

[

]

X[0.040]

[

]

X[0.056]2=

[

]

X[0.040]=

[

]

X[0.002]

[

]

X[0.018]2=

[

]

X[0.002]=

[

]

X[0.040]

[

]

X[0.056]2=

[

]

X[0.040]=

[
]
[
]
1 max.
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]

X[0.025]

[

]

X[0.065]2=

[

]

X[0.025]=

X[0.040]

[

]

X[0.075]=

[

]

X[0.040]=

X[0.040]
X[0.002]
X[0.064]
X[0.005]=
X[
]5=

[
[
[
[
[

]
]
]
]
]

X[0.056]3=
X[0.018]=
X[0.064]=
X[0.011]4=
X[
]=

[
[
[
[
[

]
]
]
]
]

X[0.040]=
X[0.002]=
X[0.025]=
X[0.005]=
X[
]=

[

]

X[0.025]=

[

]

X[0.025]=

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]

X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.00030]=
X[0.001]=
X[0.00050]=
X[0.00045]=
X[0.00040]=
X[0.00350]=
X[0.00075]=
X[0.000375]=
X[0.00027]=
X[0.00200]=
X[0.00023]=
X[0.00039]=
X[0.00225]=
X[0.00027]=
X[0.00145]=
X[0.00040]=

[

]

[

]

X[0.025]=

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]

[

Primary Non-Alarm =

Total
0.300

Qty
1

Calculation Column 3
Secondary, Non-Fire Alarm Current
(amps)

maximum alarm draw
for all devices

[
[
[
[

]
]
]
]

X[
X[
X[
X[

[

]

[

Primary Alarm =

Total
0.325

0.400

Qty
1

Total
0.255

]=
]=
]=
]=
]=

[

Secondary Non-Alarm =

Table Footnote

1.
2.
3.
4.

All eight ACM-8RF relays activated on a single module.
All annunciator LEDs on
LDM-32F with LEDs on
If using the Reverse Polarity Alarm output, add 0.005 amps; if using the Reverse Polarity Trouble output, add
another 0.005 amps.
5. Refer to the Device Compatibility Document for standby current.
6. Must use compatible listed Power Supervision Relay.
7. Maximum alarm current for each sounder base is 0.015 amps which must be supplied by aux. 24VDC source.
8. Current limitation of Terminal TB3 & TB4 circuits is 2.5 amps per NAC.
9. The total standby current must include both the nonresettable/resettable (TB1 Terminals 1 & 2) and resettable
(TB1 Terminals 3 & 4) power. Caution must be taken to ensure that current drawn from these outputs during
alarm does not exceed maximum ratings specified. Current limitations of TB3 & TB4 circuits is 2.5 amps per
NAC output and 0.5 amps per special application auxiliary power output
10.Total current draw listed above cannot exceed 6.0 amps.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

165

Power Supply Calculations

Calculating the Battery Size

7.4 Calculating the Battery Size
Use Table 7.4 to calculate the total Standby and Alarm load in ampere hours (AH).
This total load determines the battery size (in AH), required to support the control panel
under the loss of AC power. Complete Table 7.4 as follows:
1. Enter the totals from Table 7.3 on page 165, Calculation Columns 2 and 3 where
shown
2. Enter the NFPA Standby and Alarm times (refer to ‘NFPA Requirements’ below)
3. Calculate the ampere hours for Standby and Alarm, then sum the Standby and
Alarm ampere hours
4. Multiply the sum by the derating factor of 1.2 to calculate the proper battery size
(in AH)
5. Write the ampere hour requirements on the Protected Premises label located
inside the cabinet door
Table 7.4 Total Secondary Power Requirements at 24 VDC
Secondary Standby Load
(total from Table 7.3 Calculation
Column 3)
[
]

Required Standby Time
(24 or 60 hours)

Primary Alarm Load
(total from Table 7.3 Calculation
Column 2)

Required Alarm Time
(for 5 min., enter 0.084,
for 10 min., enter 0.168)

[

Sum of Standby and Alarm Ampere Hours

Multiply by the Derating Factor

X 1.2

Battery Size, Total Ampere Hours Required

]

7.4.1 NFPA Battery Requirements
•

NFPA 72 Local and Proprietary Fire Alarm Systems require 24 hours of standby
power followed by 5 minutes in alarm

•

NFPA 72 Central, Auxiliary and Remote Station Fire Alarm Systems require 60
hours of standby followed by 5 minutes in alarm. Batteries installed in a system
powered by a generator need to provide at least 4 hours of standby power

7.4.2 Selecting and Locating Batteries
Select batteries that meet or exceed the total ampere hours calculated in Table 7.4 . The
control panel can charge batteries in the 7 AH to 18 AH range. The control panel
cabinet is capable of housing batteries up to 18 AH. Batteries larger than 18 AH require
a UL listed external battery charger and cabinet such as the BB-26, F or other UL listed
external battery cabinet.

166

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Correlations

Software Zones

APPENDIX A
A.1 Correlations

Setup and configuration of an addressable system is different than a conventional
system. In a conventional system, assignment of input devices (smoke detectors, pull
stations, heat detectors, etc.) to zones is accomplished through wiring. The wiring is
direct from clearly marked panel terminals to any device assigned to a particular zone.
Connection of output devices (horns, bells, strobes, etc.) in a conventional system is
accomplished by direct wiring of the output devices to Notification Appliance Circuit
terminals.
In an addressable system, a minimum of a single pair of wires (SLC communication
loop) is used to connect all addressable input and output devices. Communications
between the FACP (Fire Alarm Control Panel) and all addressable devices takes place
over the wire pair which originates from the FACP. Software programming is used to
configure the system as opposed to direct wiring. Zone assignments are created via
software means, hence the term software zones.
Setup of an MS-9200UDLS software zone is accomplished by panel programming. Each
addressable device can be assigned to a maximum of five software zones. Each
software zone, however, may have from 1 to 99 addressable input devices assigned to it
and from 1 to 99 addressable output devices assigned to it.
Monitor and control modules comprise one group of 99 addresses, with each module
having a unique address from 1 to 99. Detectors comprise a separate group of 99
addresses, each detector having a unique address from 1 to 99 in its group. Be careful
not to duplicate addresses within any one group (modules and detectors). Refer to the
following page for an example of zoning.
In the example on the following page:
•

Zone 01 has the following addressable devices assigned to it:
SD350 smoke detectors with addresses 01 and 02
MMF-300 monitor module with address 01
MMF-302 monitor module with address 02 and 03
CMF-300 control modules with addresses 05, 06, 07, 09 and 13

•

Zone 02 has the following addressable devices assigned to it:
MMF-302 monitor module with addresses 02 and 03
CP350 smoke detectors with addresses 03 and 04
CMF-300 control modules with addresses 08, 09 and 10

•

Zone 03 has the following addressable devices assigned to it:
SD350 smoke detectors with addresses 05, 06 and 07
MMF-302 control module with address 04
CMF-300 control modules with addresses 09, 11 and 12

The example points out some of the key assignment features of the MS-9200UDLS.
Addresses of detectors are not duplicated. Addresses of monitor and control modules
are not duplicated. The control module with address 09 is assigned to three software
zones (providing floor above and floor below). Be careful to properly plan the
installation prior to installing any devices.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

167

Software Zones

Correlations
Correlation of Input and Output Zones

Input Devices

Zones

SD350
01

Output Devices
CMF-300
13

SD350
02

CMF-300
05
ZONE
01

MMF-300
01

CMF-300
06

MMF-302
02

CMF-300
07

CMF-300
09

MMF-302
03

CP350
03

ZONE
02

CMF-300
08

CMF-300
10

CP300
04

SD350
05
CMF-300
11

SD350
06

SD350
07

MMF-302
04

ZONE
03

CMF-300
12

The zone correlations which are shown graphically above are also presented in Table
A.1 on page 169 and Table A.2 on page 170.

168

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Correlations

Software Zones

Table A.1 Detector Programming Sheet Example
Address
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

Device
Type
SD350
SD350
CP350
CP350
SD350
SD350
SD350

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

Zone
Number
1
1
2
2
3
3
3

11/04/05

DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT
ADJ/NOUN
Address
Device
Type
FIRST HALL
51
ELEV. LOBBY
52
2ND FLOOR
53
ROOM 210
54
3RD FLOOR
55
MEZZANINE
56
MECH. ROOM
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

Zone
Number

ADJ/NOUN

169

Software Zones

Correlations

Table A.2 Module Programming Sheet Example
Address
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

170

Device
Type
MMF-300
MMF-302
MMF-302
MMF-302
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300
CMF-300

MONITOR/CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT
Zone
ADJ/
Address
Device
Zone
Number
NOUN
Type
Number
1
51
1, 2
52
1, 2
53
3
54
1
55
1
56
1
57
2
58
1, 2, 3
59
2
60
3
61
3
62
1
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

ADJ/NOUN

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Correlations

Software Zones

Table A.3 Blank Detector Programming Sheet - 1 of 2
Address

Device
Type

Zone
Number

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

DETECTOR ZONE ASSIGNMENT
ADJ/
Address
Device
NOUN
Type
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

Zone
Number

ADJ/NOUN

171

Software Zones

Correlations

Table A.4 Blank Module Programming Sheet - 1 of 2
Address
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

172

Device
Type

MONITOR/CONTROL MODULE ZONE ASSIGNMENT
Zone
ADJ/
Address
Device
Zone
Number
NOUN
Type
Number
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

ADJ/NOUN

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Correlations

Default Programming

APPENDIX B

The following table provides a list of the programming options and their factory default
settings.
Program Option

Factory Default

Program Option

Factory Default

Detector Programming

Not Installed

Daylight Savings

Yes

Detector Type

Smoke-Photo

Month Start Daylight Savings

April

Detector Verification

Off

Week Start Daylight Savings

1st Week

Detector Walktest

Yes

Month End Daylight Savings

October

Detector PAS

Week End Daylight

Last Week

Detector Presignal

Verification

Detector Zone Assign.

000 only

(future)

Detector Adj/Noun

none

PAS Timer

Module Programming

Not Installed

Presignal Timer

Module Type

Monitor

Waterflow Retard Timer

Module Walktest

Yes

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Enable

Enabled

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Silenceable

Yes

(not used)
Module Presignal

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Type

Bell

Module Zone Assign.

000 only

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Sync Type

System Sensor

Module Adj/Noun

none

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Autosilence

Zone 0 Enable

Enabled

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Coding

Steady

Zone 1 Enable

Enabled

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Zones

Zone 000 only

Zone 2 Enable

Enabled

NAC 1, 2, 3 & 4 Silence Inhibit

Zone 3 Enable

Enabled

Relay 1

Alarm

.........................through..........

.....................

Relay 2

Trouble (fixed)

Zone 96 Enable

Enabled

Relay 3

Supervisory

Zones 97, 98 & 99

Enabled

(future)

Annunciator Terminal Mode

(future)
Loop Style

Style 4

Annunciator ACS Mode

Loop Protocol

CLIP

UDACT

Trouble Reminder

Off

ACS Installed

Banner

Fire•Lite

Onboard DACT

Time Format

12 Hr

Printer-PC

Hours Setting

Printer Baud

9600

Minutes Setting

Second Settings

AM-PM Setting

Month Setting

Day Setting

Year Setting

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

173

NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements

APPENDIX C

Correlations

NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements
The MS-9200UDLS has been designed for use in commercial, industrial and institutional
applications and meets the requirements for service under the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA) Standards outlined in this Appendix. The minimum system
components required for compliance with the appropriate NFPA standard are listed
below:
MS-9200UDLS Control Panel
Contains the main control board, cabinet (backbox and door), main power supply
transformer and power supply.
Batteries
Refer to "Power Supply Calculations" on page 163, for Standby Power Requirements.
Initiating Devices
Connected to one of the control panel's Initiating Device Circuits.
Notification Appliances
Connected to the control panel's Notification Appliance Circuits via a control module.
The following additional equipment is needed for compliance with the NFPA 72
standards listed below:
NFPA 72 NATIONAL FIRE ALARM STANDARDS FOR:
NFPA 72 Central Station Service (Protected Premises Unit) or Remote Station
Service
Onboard Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter for connection to a
compatible listed Central Station DACR or Protected Premises
Receiving Unit. This unit must be installed as outlined in "Digital
Alarm Communicator/Transmitter" on page 17.
OR
4XTMF Transmitter Module for connection to the RS82 Remote Station
Receiver. See Figure C.2, “Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF
Module,” on page 176, for installation instructions for this unit.
NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System
F Transmitter Module for connection to a compatible listed Local Energy Municipal
Box. This unit must be installed as illustrated in the section titled "4XTMF
Transmitter Module Installation" on page 38 and as outlined in Figure C.1, “Municipal
Box Connected to F Transmitter Module,” on page 175.
NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System
MS-9200UDLS Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory contacts connected to Transmitter(s).
See Figure C.3, “Proprietary Protective Signaling System,” on page 177, for installation
instructions for this unit.

174

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Correlations

NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements
NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System
All connections are power-limited and supervised. This application is not suitable for
separate transmission of sprinkler supervisory or trouble conditions.
Notes:
1. 3 ohms maximum loop resistance allowed for wiring from control panel to
Municipal Box.
2. Cut JP3 on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board to supervise placement of
4XTMF module and circuit.
3. Cut JP2 on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board to enable FACP Supervisory
relay.
4. Refer to "4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation" on page 38 for detailed
information.
Figure C.1 Municipal Box Connected to F Transmitter Module

+
Municipal Box
Circuit

FIRE

Gamewell Model M34-56
Local Energy Municipal Box

Polarities shown in alarm condition

Nonpower-limited

Figure C.1 Municipal Box Connected to 4XTMF Transmitter Module

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

175

NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements

Correlations

NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System
Notes:
1. Cut Jumper JP3 on the MS-9200UDLS main circuit board to supervise placement
of the 4XTMF module.
2. Refer to "4XTMF Transmitter Module Installation" on page 38 for detailed
information.
RS82 Remote Station Receiver UL listed.
Refer to Instruction Manual for Remote Station Receiver
Model RS82.

Polarity Shown is
Normal Standby

Power-limited

(Dummy load with a 4.7KΩ, ¼ watt
resistor when no connection is made)
Cutting TBL Jumper allows the
reverse polarity circuit to open
with a system trouble condition
if no alarm condition exists.

4XTMF Transmitter Module

Figure C.2 Remote Station Connection Using 4XTMF Module

176

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Correlations

NFPA Standard-Specific Requirements
NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems

MS-9200UDLS Addressable Fire Control Panel
MS-9200UDLS Main Board

Form-C Alarm contact programmed to
activate on General Alarm.
Form-C Trouble contact which will
automatically activate on any Trouble
condition.

Form-C relay contact programmed to
activate on Supervisory condition.

Notes:
1. Connection between the MS-9200UDLS and
the transmitter are supervised by the
transmitter.
2. This MS-9200UDLS/Transmitter
arrangement can be employed for NFPA 72
Proprietary Protective Signaling System.

Figure C.3 Proprietary Protective Signaling System

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

177

Wire Requirements

Correlations

Wire Requirements

APPENDIX D

T-tapping of the SLC loop wiring is allowed for 2-wire (Style 4) configurations. The
total resistance of any branch cannot exceed 40 ohms. The total wire length of all
branches cannot exceed 10,000 feet (3,000 m).
Connecting external system accessories to the MS-9200UDLS main circuits must be
carefully considered to ensure proper operation. It is important to use the correct type
of wire, wire gauge and wire run length for each MS-9200UDLS circuit. Reference the
chart below to specify wire requirements and limitations for each MS-9200UDLS
circuit.
Note: If the SLC loop is to be run in conduit with Notification Appliance Circuits, the
risk of encountering problems can be greatly reduced by exclusively employing
electronic sounders (such as MA/SS-24D) instead of more electronically noisy
notification appliances such as electromechanical bells or horns.
Table D.1 MS-9200UDLS Wire Specifications
CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS

WIRE REQUIREMENTS

Circuit Type

Circuit Function

Wire Type and Limitations

SLC loop
(power-limited)

Connects to
Addressable
Devices

Twisted pair, 40 ohms
maximum per length of
Style 6 and 7 loops. 40
ohms per branch maximum
for Style 4 loops1

Recommended
Max. Distance
Feet (meters)

Untwisted, unshielded pair
Twisted, shielded pair with a
characteristic impedance of
120 ohms
Twisted, shielded pair

3,000 (900 m)
6,000 (1,800 m)

12 AWG (3.1 mm2): Genesis WG-4315,
WG-4515, Belden 5020UL, 6020UL
14 AWG (2.00 mm2):Genesis WG-4313,
WG-4513, Belden 5120UL, 6120UL
16 AWG (1.30 mm2): Genesis WG-4311,
WG-4511, Belden 5220UL, 6220UL
18 AWG (0.78 mm2): Genesis WG-4306,
WG-4506, Belden 5320UL, 6320UL
12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2)
18 AWG (0.75 mm2)

50 (15 m)

18 AWG (0.75 mm2) minimum

2,500 (760 m)

12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2)

2,500 (760 m)

12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2)

Distance limitation
set by 1.2 volt
maximum line
drop
Distance limitation
set by 1.2 volt
maximum line
drop
Distance limitation
set by 1.2 volt
maximum line
drop
20 (6 m)

12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2)

10,000 (3,000 m)
8,000 (2,400 m)
4,875 (1,450 m)
3,225 (980 m)

ACS/TERM
(EIA-485)
(power-limited)
EIA-232
(power-limited)

Connects to
annunciator
modules
connects to
remote printer
and PC computer
Initiating Device
Circuit

MMF-302
(power-limited)

Initiating Device
Circuit

CMF-300
(power-limited)

Notification
Appliance
Circuit

Maximum loop wire
resistance is 40 ohms for the
MMF-300 and 20 ohms for
the MMF-301
No more than a 2.4 volt drop
allowed at end of circuit.
Maximum loop wire
resistance is 25 ohms
In alarm, no more than a 1.2
volt drop allowed at end of
circuit

24 VDC
filtered
resettable
(power-limited)
24 VDC
nonresettable
(power-limited)

Connects to
4-wire smoke
detectors

No more than 1.2 volt drop
allowed from supply source
to end of any branch

Connects to
control modules,
annunciators and
accessories
Remote
secondary power
source

No more than 1.2 volt drop
allowed from supply source
to end of any branch

MMF-300 and
MMF-301
(power-limited)

CHG-120F or
CHG-75

Wire Gauge and Compatible Brands

12 AWG (3.25 mm2) in
conduit

12-18 AWG (3.25 - 0.75 mm2)

Table Footnote

1. When using untwisted, unshielded wire, full conduit is recommended for optimum EMI/RFI protection.

178

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Control Module Operation

HVAC Control

APPENDIX E

The FACP can be programmed to shut down a building’s HVAC fans in the event of a
fire. The fans cannot be restarted until the fire alarm condition has been cleared and the
FACP has been reset to a normal (non-alarm) condition.
IMPORTANT! This HVAC feature is not to be used for smoke control. It is only
designed to shut down fans during a fire alarm condition.

E.1 Control Module Operation
E.1.1 HVAC SHUTDN
The HVAC SHUTDN type code can be assigned to any addressable control relay
module for the purpose of shutting down HVAC fans during a fire alarm condition.
Devices connected to a module with this type code are unsupervised. To program this
feature in the FACP:
•

•

Program the HVAC SHUTDN type code to the control module which will be
used to shut down the fans (refer to Type under the section titled "Edit Module
Screen for Control Modules" on page 68).
Program the control module to a software zone and program alarm input devices
which, when activated are to cause fan shutdown, to the same software zone
(refer to Zone Assignment under the section titled "Edit Module Screen for
Control Modules" on page 68).
Monitor the control module using an addressable monitor module programmed
for Supervisory Auto-resettable. The monitor module label should be
programmed to indicate HVAC SHUTDOWN. When the control module is
active (HVAC SHUTDN), the monitor module will indicate a supervisory
condition at the FACP and the display should indicate the HVAC is shut down.

Once activated, the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated, even if the
FACP is silenced or reset. After the alarm condition on the FACP has been cleared and
the panel reset, the HVAC SHUTDN control module remains activated and the fans
remain off. The monitor module programmed for Supervisory Auto-resettable which is
being used to supervise the control module, will indicate a supervisory condition at the
control panel and the LCD should display that the HVAC is shut down. The fans can
only be restarted when the HVAC SHUTDN control module is deactivated by the
HVAC RESTART module.

E.2 Monitor Module Operation
E.2.1 HVAC RESTART
The HVAC RESTART type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module
for the purpose of resetting (deactivating) the HVAC SHUTDN control module and
turning the fans back on. The HVAC RESTART monitor module acts globally
throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular software
zone. To program this feature in the FACP:
•

Program the HVAC RESTART type code to the monitor module which will be
used to deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control module and restart the fans (refer
to Type Monitor under the section titled "Edit Module Screen for Monitor
Module" on page 59).

The HVAC RESTART monitor module does not latch when activated. Pressing a
switch connected to the monitor module will deactivate the HVAC SHUTDN control
module only if the fire alarm condition has been cleared and the FACP reset to a normal
condition. Pressing the switch during an alarm condition will have no effect.

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

179

HVAC Control

Monitor Module Operation

E.2.2 HVAC OVRRIDE
The HVAC OVRRIDE type code can be assigned to any addressable monitor module for the
purpose of overriding or preventing the HVAC SHUTDN control modules from activating and
shutting down fan during an alarm or manual evacuate condition. The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor
module acts globally throughout the FACP system and therefore is not programmed to a particular
software zone. To program this feature in the FACP:
•

Program the HVAC OVRRIDE type code to the monitor module which will be used to
override the HVAC SHUTDN control module and prevent the fans from turning off (refer to
Type Monitor under the section titled "Edit Module Screen for Monitor Module" on page
59).

The HVAC OVRRIDE monitor module does not latch when activated. Activating a switch
connected to the monitor module will override all HVAC SHUTDN control modules in the system,
preventing the fans from being turned off and causing the FACP LCD to display an active HVAC
OVRRIDE module. Releasing the switch will allow the HVAC SHUTDN control modules to
activate, turning off the fans.
Note: Activation of the HVAC OVRRIDE module causes a trouble event that will be
communicated to the Central Station if enabled.

180

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A

11/04/05

Index
Numerics
24 Hour Test Time 105
300 Series addressable devices 19
4XTMF module 175, 176
coil resistance 38
current 38
installation 38
installation steps 39
see also Transmitter Module 13, 20
supervisory relay config. 39
voltage 38
A
AC Branch Circuit
calculations 163
AC Loss Delay 86
AC Power 31
current 13
current, maximum 31
voltage 13
wiring 13, 31
Account Code 104
Acknowledge/Step 16, 128
ACM LED annunciator 41
ACM Series
see also annunciator 22
ACM-16ATF Annunciator 22
ACM-32AF Annunciator 22
ACM-8RF 13
contact rating 41
see also Relay Control Module 41
ACS 22
ACS LED annunciator 13
add Detector 48
add Module 58
addressable 12
addressable detectors
see also detectors 13
Addressable Device Accessories 19
addressable modules 19
see also modules 13
addressing
annunciators 41
see also device addressing 79
see also module or detector addressing 19
Adjective
control module 72
list 55
monitor module 65
multiple entries 57
AEM-16ATF Annunciator 22
AEM-32AF Annunciator 22
AFM annunciator 41
AFM-16AF Annunciator 22
AFM-16ATF Annunciator 22
AFM-32AF Annunciator 22
Alarm 132
Alarm Silence 16, 128
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A 11/04/05

alarm verification 13, 52, 135, 139
annunciator 22
ACM 13, 41
ACM-8RF 13
LCD-80F 13
LDM Graphic 13
annunciator addressing 41
annunciator, graphic
see also LDM Series 23
annunciator, remote
see also LCD-80F 23
Automatic Test Operation 135
Autoprogramming 13, 43, 47
Autosilence 13, 138
NAC 89
auxiliary DC power 31
B
backbox 18
see also cabinet 30
Backup Reporting 102
Banner 80
setting 81
battery 18
cable connection 31
charger 17
charger capacity 14
Charging Circuit 14
see also secondary power 14, 31
battery box 21
battery charger 21
disable 14
external 21
baud rate 115
BB-55F
see also battery box 18, 21
C
cabinet
dimensions 29, 30
cabinet mounting 27
Calculate System Current Draw 164
Calculating the Battery Size 166
Callback 159
Canadian Applications 26
Canadian Option 80, 93
Central Station 101, 160
account code 104
communications 153
phone number 105
Phone Numbers 103
report style 114
CHG-120F
see also battery charger 21
see also remote battery charger 14
CHG-75
see also battery charger 21
see also remote battery charger 14
Clasic Loop Interface Protocol 79
181

Index
Class A 32
Class B 32
NAC wiring 33
CLIP mode
see also Classic Loop Interface Protocol 79
Clock Format 83
Coded Operation 136
Coding
NAC 89
coding
two stage operation 90
communications format 106, 107
Control Buttons 128
control module 19
description display 74
display 68
edit 68
enable/disable 69
noun 73
noun/adjective 71, 72
silenceable 71
type 70
type codes 70
Correlations 167
current
AC Power 31
availability 15
maximum 15
Current Draw Calculations 165
D
DACT
enable 97
onboard 97
data
see also detector data and sensitivity 135
Data Entry
via computer keyboard 42
via keypad 42
data values
see also detector data and sensitivity 13
Date setting 83
Daylight Savings Time 83
DC power
nonresettable 31
resettable 31
see also auxiliary DC power 31
Default Programming 173
Delete Detector 49
Delete Module 59
Description
control module 74
detector label 57
monitor module 67
Detector
add 48
adding description 54
delete 49
182

edit 49
enable/disable 51
screen display 50
type 52
verification 52
detector data 135, 150, 151
acceptable range 150
printout 150
Detector Programming 48
device addressing 79
Digital Communicator 24
dimensions
cabinet 29
DIRTY1 151
DIRTY2 151
Disable 76
Disable Point
Maintenance Level 121
Downloading 158, 161
dress panel 18, 20
drift compensation 13, 151
definition 151
Drill 16, 128
E
earth ground 31
edit
control module 68
detector 49
detector screens 50
module, monitor 59
EIA-232 40
for PC/Printer connection 15
see also Printer/PC interface 13
EIA-485
for ACS annunciators 15
for LCD-80F 15
Enable 75
Enable/Disable
control module 69
detector 51
module, monitor 62
End-of-Line Resistor Assembly 19
Enter key 45
Erase History 94
Error Checking 160
event codes 107
exiting
programming 43, 44
Read Status 43, 44
F
FACP
see also Fire Alarm Control Panel 12
Features 12
Fire Alarm Control Panel
see also FACP 12
Format Selection Address 154
Form-C relay 17, 32, 41
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A 11/04/05

Index
G
general alarm zone 64
see also zone Z00 54
ground fault 40
H
Hazard Condition 134
History 94
erase 94
Maintenance Level 122
view events 94
History file 13
HVAC Control 179
HVAC OVRRIDE 180
HVAC RESTART 179
HVAC SHUTDN 179
I
Indicators 16
Installation 27
intelligent 12
Inventory 12
INVREP 151
K
Key Panel 16
function keys 16
service/program keys 16
keyboard and keypad 42
Keypad/Display
removal and installation 37
L
lamp test 16
LCD display 13, 16
LCD-80F annunciator 13, 23
LDM Series annunciator 23
LDM-32 Graphic Annunciator 13
LED
AC Power 129
Alarm Silenced 129
Battery 129
Disabled 129
Fire Alarm 129
Ground 129
Kiss-off 129
Maintenance 129
Primary Line Active 129
Secondary Line Active 129
see also Indicators 16
Supervisory 129
Trouble 129
LED annunciator 22
Local Energy Municipal Box Service 38
Loop Setup 79
M
Maintenance Alert 13, 135
levels 151
maintenance alert 151
Maintenance Program Level 2 44, 120
Manual Dial Mode 114
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A 11/04/05

Manual programming 43
Master Program Level 1 44, 46
Medical Alert 134
Mode key 45
Module
add 58
addressing 19
delete 59
edit monitor 59
enable/disable 62
see also addressable modules 19
Module Programming 58
Monitor module 19
adjective 65
enable/disable 62
noun 66
noun/adjective 64
type 62
type action 63
Type list 62
type selection 63
Mounting
cabinet 27
main circuit board 27
municipal box transmitter
see also 4XTMF module 38
N
NAC 14, 17, 86, 88, 134
Auto Silence 89
coded 136
coding 89
current 14
End-of-Line Resistor 14
power 12
see also Notification Appliance Circuit 12, 32
silence inhibit 91
silenceable 88
Style configuration 33
Style Y wiring diagram 33
synchronized 136
type codes 88
voltage drop 14
voltage, operating 14
wiring Style 32
NAC enable/disable 87
NAC options 80
NACKEY card 33
N-ELR Mounting Plate 19
NFPA 72 Auxiliary Fire Alarm System 174, 175
NFPA 72 Central Station Service (Protected Premises
Unit) or Remote Station Service 174
NFPA 72 Proprietary Fire Alarm System 174
NFPA 72 Proprietary Protective Signaling Systems 177
NFPA 72 Remote Station Protective Signaling System
176
NFPA Battery Requirements 166
NFPA Standard 174
183

Index
nonpower-limited
relay connections 32
Nonresettable Power 17
current 14, 31
nonsilenceable
waterflow 78, 93
Normal 130
normal display 43
Notification Appliance Circuit 14, 86
see also NAC 12, 32
Noun
list 56
monitor module 66
multiple entries 57
Noun/Adjective 54, 56
control module 71
monitor module 64
O
Off-line Programming 43
Operating Instructions 128
Operation
alarm 132
disable/enable 135
hazard condition 134
medical alert 134
NAC 134
normal 130
process monitor 134
programmed zone 135
supervisory 133
trouble 130
waterflow 135
Option Modules 20, 37, 96
annunciators/UDACT 96
Printer/PC 115
Options 12
Output Circuits 17
P
Panel ID 99
Panel Identification Number 160
PAS 53, 76, 137
see also Positive Alarm Sequence 13, 53
PAS BYPASS 137
PAS timer 84
Password 13, 44
change 116
Maintenance Level 2 45, 120
Master Level 1 45
PC (personal computer)
configuration 40
connection 40
ground fault 40
Phone Number 105
Piezo
see also sounder 16
PK-CD Programming Utility 20
Point Program 48
184

Positive Alarm Sequence 53, 137
see also PAS 13
power
NAC 12
nonresettable 14
resettable smoke 14
system 12
power supply calculations 163
power-limited
relay connections 32
Power-up
first time 44
Pre-signal 13, 53, 76
function 136
selection 64
Pre-signal Delay timer 85
Pre-signal timer 84
Primary Phone 98
primary power
see also AC Power 31
printer
baud rate 115
configuration 40
connection 40
ground fault 40
setup 40
Printer/PC interface 13
Process Monitor 134
Program
check 118
check correlations 118
clear 117
Program Check
Maintenance Level 123
program keys
see also Key Panel 16
Programming 42, 43
autoprogramming 43
exiting 43
factory default 173
Level 1 44
Level 2 44
manual 43
Master Level 1 46
modules 58
off-line computer 43
via computer keyboard 42
via panel keypad 42
Programming Levels 44
Programming Screens 44
Programming Sheet 169, 170, 171
Programming Utility
see also PK-CD 20
PRT/PK-CABLE
for PC/Printer connection 40
R
Read Status 43, 140
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A 11/04/05

Index
annunciators 147, 148
exiting 43
history 146
NAC 145
power 143
Print 150
printer/PC 149
program check 146
relay 145
system point 141
Time-Date 152
timers 144
trouble reminder 144
zones 142
Real-Time Clock 135
Recall/Increment Function 57, 67, 74
Receivers 157
Relay 14, 17, 32, 92
connections 32
contact rating 14, 17, 32
fixed 32
Form-C 14, 92
programmable 12, 17, 32
programming 92
selections 92
trouble 12, 17, 32
Relay Control Module
see also ACM-8RF 41
Relay options 80
Remote Station Service 38
remote switch functions 13
remote sync output 14
Remote Synchronization 34
REN
see also Ringer Equivalence Number 24
Report Style 114
Reporting Enable 101
Reset 16, 128
Resettable Power 17, 31
current 31
see also Smoke Detector Power 14
Ring Count 101
Ringer Equivalence Number 24
S
Secondary Phone 98
Secondary Power Requirements 166
Secret Code 159
Security Features 159
sensitivity 135, 151
see also smoke detector sensitivity 135
Service Terminal 99, 100
Signal rate 13
Signaling Line Circuit
see also SLC 14
Silence Inhibit 13, 91, 138
Silenceable
control module 71
MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A 11/04/05

NAC 88
waterflow 93
silenceable circuits
synchronized signals 88
Silenceable waterflow 78
SLC 12, 17
current 14
reference manual 14
resistance 14
see also Signaling Line Circuit 12, 14
Style 17
voltage 14
wiring length 14
SLC Loop Protocol 79
SLC Style 79
smoke detector
chamber reading 150
data 135, 150
sensitivity 13, 135
Smoke Detector Power
current 14
Software Zones 12, 167
sounder 16
Specifications 13
strobe synchronization 13
Style 12
Style Y 32
NAC wiring 33
NC configuration 33
Style Z 32
NAC configuration 33
wiring 34
subscreen 44
Supervisory 133
supervisory relay
configuring for 4XTMF 39
sync
programming 87
see also synchronization 91
sync output 14
current 14
End-of-Line resistor 14
voltage 14
synchronization 34, 136, 145
by manufacturer 91
programming 91
see also strobe synchronization 13
synchronized 136
synchronized signals 136
and silenceable circuits 88
System
Maintenance Level 124
System Point 141
system power 12
System Setup 80
T
Telephone Circuitry 24
185

Index
Telephone Company
Rights and Warnings 25
telephone line 36
Terminal 100, 101
Test Time Interval 104, 105
Time and Date
Maintenance Level 125
Time setting 82
Time-Date setting 80, 82
Time-out 159
Timers 80
Transformer Assembly 18
Transmittal Priorities 156
Transmitter Module 38
see also 4XTMF module 20
Trouble 130
trouble display 131
trouble relay 12
Trouble Reminder 80, 138, 144
trouble responses 131
Two Stage 76
two stage operation 90
Type
control module 70
detector 52
monitor module 62
NAC 88
type code
control module 70
supervision 135
verification 13
U
UL power-limited wiring requirements 35
see also power-limited and nonpower-limited 32
Upload/Download 158
Uploading 162
V
Verification
detector 52
Verify Loops 93
View Events 94
voltage
measurements 143
ranges 143
W
Walktest 13, 52, 71, 95
audible 95
Maintenance Level 124
operation 139
selection 64
silent 95
waterflow
nonsilenceable 78, 93
silenceable 78, 93
Waterflow Delay timer 84, 85
Waterflow Retard Timer 138
Waterflow Silenceable 80
186

Wire Requirements 178
wiring
AC Power 31
earth ground 31
NAC Style Y 33
NAC Style Z 34
wiring Style 12
X
XRM-24
see Transformer
Z
Z00 54, 64
Z97
PAS zone 53
Z98 54
Zone 97 76
Zone 98 76
Zone Assignment 54, 64, 91
control module 71
Zone Setup 75
Maintenance Level 126
zone type 78
list 78
Zone Z97 53
Zone Z98
pre-signal zone 54
Zones 142, 167
see also software zones 12
Zones Disabled 77
Zones Enabled 77
Zones Installed 77
zones per device 54

MS-9200UDLS PN 52750:A 11/04/05

Limited Warranty
The manufacturer warrants products manufactured by it to be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for eighteen (18) months from the
date of manufacture, under normal use and service. Products are date
stamped at time of manufacture. The sole and exclusive obligation of the
manufacturer is to repair or replace, at its option, free of charge for parts
and labor, any part that is defective in materials or workmanship under
normal use and service. All returns for credit are subject to inspection
and testing at the factory before actual determination is made to allow
credit. The manufacturer does not warrant products not manufactured by
it, but assigns to the purchaser any warranty extended by the
manufacturer of such products. This warranty is void if the product is
altered or repaired by anyone other than the manufacturer or as expressly
authorized by the manufacturer in writing, or is serviced by anyone other
than the manufacturer or its authorized distributors. This warranty is also
void if there is a failure to maintain the products and systems in which
they operate in a proper and workable manner. In case of defect, secure
a Return Material Authorization form from our Return Authorization
Department.
This writing constitutes the only warranty made by the manufacturer, with
respect to its products. The manufacturer, does not represent that its
products will prevent any loss by fire or otherwise, or that its products will
in all cases provide the protection for which they are installed or intended.
Buyer acknowledges that the manufacturer, is not an insurer and
assumes no risk for loss or damages or the cost of any inconvenience,
transportation damage, misuse, abuse, accident or similar incident.
THE MANUFACTURER GIVES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR OTHERWISE WHICH EXTENDS BEYOND THE
DESCRIPTION ON THE FACE HEREOF.
UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL THE MANUFACTURER BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOSS OF OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY, DIRECT, INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF, OR INABILITY
TO USE THE MANUFACTURER’S PRODUCTS. FURTHERMORE, THE
MANUFACTURER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH WHICH MAY ARISE IN THE COURSE OF, OR AS A
RESULT OF, PERSONAL, COMMERCIAL OR INDUSTRIAL USE OF ITS
PRODUCTS.
This warranty replaces all previous warranties and is the only warranty
made by the manufacturer. No increase or alteration, written or verbal, of
the obligation of this warranty is authorized.
Warn-GL-04-2005.fm

World Headquarters
One Fire-Lite Place, Northford, CT 06472-1653 USA
203-484-7161 • Fax 203-484-7118
www.firelite.com
©2005 by Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this document is strictly prohibited.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V2.3 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Modify Date                     : 2006:01:24 08:38:44-05:00
Create Date                     : 2005:11:15 14:13:35-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2006:01:24 08:38:44-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : firms9200UDLScombenglA0.fm
Creator                         : E651696
Document ID                     : uuid:33aa9f27-3f91-40cf-9ddc-09a3869d1dd8
Instance ID                     : uuid:29684ac9-dd69-4fbf-9195-c2bc9f4b7dff
Page Count                      : 188
Author                          : E651696

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Honeywell Ms 9200Udls Users Manual Firms9200UDLScombenglA0

MS9200UDLS Installation Manual MS9200UDLS Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library

MS-9200UDLSE to the manual 154cef1e-ba3b-4916-b6cc-4bcd91d3c987

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation